E500 Ac Drive Genis Kullanim Kilavuzu

TRANSISTORIZED INVERTER
FR-E500
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FR-E500
HIGH PERFORMANCE
&
HIGH FUNCTION
FR-E520-0.1K to 7.5K(C) OUTLINE Chapter 1
TRANSISTORIZED INVERTER
FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K(C) INSTALLATION
Chapter 2
FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.75K AND WIRING
FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K OPERATION/

CONTROL
Chapter 3
PARAMETERS Chapter 4
PROTECTIVE
Chapter 5
FUNCTIONS
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
MAINTENANCE/
Chapter 6
HEAD OFFICE:MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100-8310 INSPECTION
SPECIFICATONS Chapter 7
IB(NA) 66813-G (0405) MDOC Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.
Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Transistorized inverter.
This instruction manual gives handling information and precautions for use of this
equipment.
Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using the inverter, please
read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum.
Please forward this manual to the end user.
This section is specifically about safety matters

Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter until you have read
through this instruction manual and appended documents carefully and can use the
equipment correctly.
Do not use the inverter until you have a full knowledge of the equipment, safety
information and instructions.
In this manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into "WARNING" and
"CAUTION".
Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous

WARNING conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.
Assumes that incorrect handling may cause
CAUTION hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight
injury, or may cause physical damage only.
Note that even the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence
according to conditions. Please follow the instructions of both levels because they are
important to personnel safety.
A-1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1. Electric Shock Prevention
WARNING
z While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover.
You may get an electric shock.
z Do not run the inverter with the front cover or wiring cover removed. Otherwise,
you may access the exposed high-voltage terminals or the charging part of the
circuitry and get an electric shock.
z If power is off, do not remove the front cover except for wiring or periodic
inspection. You may access the charged inverter circuits and get an electric shock.
z Before starting wiring or inspection, check to make sure that the inverter power
indicator lamp is off, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been
switched off, and check that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the
like. The capacitor is charged with high voltage for some time after power off and
it is dangerous.
z This inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (grounding) must conform to
the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes.
(JIS, NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
z Any person who is involved in the wiring or inspection of this equipment should
be fully competent to do the work.
z Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric
shock or be injured.
z Operate the switches and potentiometers with dry hands to prevent an electric
shock.
z Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or
pinching. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
z Do not change the cooling fan while power is on.
It is dangerous to change the cooling fan while power is on.
2. Fire Prevention
CAUTION
z Mount the inverter and brake resistor on an incombustible surface. Installing the
inverter directly on or near a combustible surface could lead to a fire.
z If the inverter has become faulty, switch off the inverter power. A continuous flow
of large current could cause a fire.
z When a brake resistor is used, use an alarm signal to switch power off.
Otherwise, the brake resistor may excessively overheat due to damage of the
brake transistor and such, causing a fire.
z Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P(+), N(-). This could cause
a fire.
A-2
3. Injury Prevention
CAUTION
z Apply only the voltage specified in the instruction manual to each terminal to
prevent damage etc.
z Ensure that the cables are connected to the correct terminals. Otherwise,
damage etc. may occur.
z Always make sure that polarity is correct to prevent damage etc.
z While power is on and for some time after power-off, do not touch the inverter or
brake resistor as they are hot and you may get burnt.
4. Additional Instructions
Also note the following points to prevent an accidental failure, injury, electric shock, etc.
(1) Transportation and installation

CAUTION
z When carrying products, use correct lifting gear to prevent injury.
z Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended.
z Ensure that installation position and material can withstand the weight of the
inverter. Install according to the information in the Instruction Manual.
z Do not operate if the inverter is damaged or has parts missing.
z Do not hold the inverter by the front cover or operation panel; it may fall off.
z Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the inverter.
z Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct.
z Prevent screws, wire fragments or other conductive bodies or oil or other
flammable substance from entering the inverter.
z Do not drop the inverter, or subject it to impact.
z Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions:
Ambient -10°C to +50°C(non-freezing)
temperature (-10°C to +40°C for totally enclosed structure feature)
Ambient humidity 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Environment
Storage
-20°C to +65°C *
temperature
Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust
Ambience
and dirt)
Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard operation. After
Altitude, vibration that derate by 3% for every extra 500m up to 2500m (91%).
5.9m/s2 or less (conforming to JIS C 0040)
*Temperatures applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
A-3
(2) Wiring
CAUTION
z Do not fit capacitive equipment such as power factor correction capacitor, radio
noise filter or surge suppressor to the output of the inverter.
z The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the motor will affect
the direction of rotation of the motor.
(3) Trial run

CAUTION
z Check all parameters, and ensure that the machine will not be damaged by a
sudden start-up.
(4) Operation
WARNING
z When you have chosen the retry function, stay away from the equipment as it will
restart suddenly after an alarm stop.
z The [STOP] key is valid only when the appropriate function setting has been
made. Prepare an emergency stop switch separately.
z Make sure that the start signal is off before resetting the inverter alarm. A failure
to do so may restart the motor suddenly.
z The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only. Connection of any
other electrical equipment to the inverter output may damage the equipment.
z Do not modify the equipment.
z Do not perform parts removal which is not instructed in this manual. Doing so
may lead to fault or damage of the inverter.
A-4
CAUTION
z The electronic thermal reray function does not guarantee protection of the motor
from overheating.
z Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent starting/
stopping of the inverter.
z Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference. Otherwise
nearby electronic equipment may be affected.
z Take measures to suppress harmonics. Otherwise power supply harmonics from
the inverter may heat/damage the power capacitor and generator.
z When a 400V class motor is inverter-driven, it should be insulation-enhanced or
surge voltages suppressed. Surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants
may occur at the motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor.
z When parameter clear or all clear is performed, each parameter returns to the
factory setting. Re-set the required parameters before starting operation.
z The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before changing its
setting, fully examine the performances of the motor and machine.
z In addition to the inverter's holding function, install a holding device to ensure
safety.
z Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long period, always
perform inspection and test operation.
(5) Emergency stop

CAUTION
z Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the
machine and equipment from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails.
z When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault
(short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc. Identify the cause of
the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
z When any protective function is activated, take the corrective appropriate action,
then reset the inverter, and resume operation.
(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement

CAUTION
z Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the
inverter.
(7) Disposing of the inverter

CAUTION
z Treat as industrial waste.
(8) General instructions

Many of the diagrams and drawings in this instruction manual show the inverter
without a cover, or partially open. Never operate the inverter in this manner. Always
replace the cover and follow this instruction manual when operating the inverter.
A-5
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE 1
Contents
1.1 Pre-Operation Information..................................................................................... 2
1.1.1 Precautions for operation .................................................................................. 2
1.2 Basic Configuration ............................................................................................... 4
1.2.1 Basic configuration ............................................................................................ 4
1.3 Structure ................................................................................................................. 5
1.3.1 Appearance and structure ................................................................................. 5
1.3.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover .................................................... 6
1.3.3 Removal and reinstallation of the wiring cover .................................................. 8
1.3.4 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel ............................................ 9
1.3.5 Removal of the operation panel front cover..................................................... 10
1.3.6 Exploded view ................................................................................................. 11
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 13
2.1 Installation ............................................................................................................ 14

2.1.1 Instructions for installation ............................................................................... 14
2.2 Wiring .................................................................................................................... 16
2.2.1 Terminal connection diagram .......................................................................... 16
2.2.2 Wiring of the Main Circuit ................................................................................ 20
2.2.3 Wiring of the control circuit .............................................................................. 25
2.2.4 Connection to the PU connector...................................................................... 29
2.2.5 Connection of stand-alone option units ........................................................... 33
2.2.6 Design information........................................................................................... 37
2.3 Other Wiring.......................................................................................................... 38
2.3.1 Power supply harmonics ................................................................................. 38
2.3.2 Harmonic suppression guideline ..................................................................... 39
2.3.3 Inverter-generated noise and reduction techniques ........................................ 42
2.3.4 Leakage currents and countermeasures ......................................................... 46
2.3.5 Inverter-driven 400V class motor..................................................................... 47
2.3.6 Peripheral devices ........................................................................................... 48
2.3.7 Power off and magnetic contactor (MC) .......................................................... 53
2.3.8 Instructions for UL, cUL ................................................................................... 54
2.3.9 Instructions for compliance with the European Directive................................. 55
CHAPTER 3 OPERATION/CONTROL 57
3.1 Pre-Operation Information................................................................................... 58

3.1.1 Types of operation modes ............................................................................... 58
3.1.2 Power on ......................................................................................................... 60
3.2 About the Operation Panel .................................................................................. 61
I
3.2.1 Names and functions of the operation panel ................................................... 61
3.2.2 Monitor display is changed by pressing the [MODE] key ................................ 62
3.2.3 Monitoring........................................................................................................ 62
3.2.4 Frequency setting ............................................................................................ 63
3.2.5 Parameter setting method ............................................................................... 63
3.2.6 Operation mode............................................................................................... 66
3.2.7 Help mode ....................................................................................................... 66
3.3 Operation .............................................................................................................. 68
3.3.1 Pre-operation checks....................................................................................... 68
3.3.2 PU operation mode (Operation using the operation panel) ............................. 69
3.3.3 External operation mode (Operation using the external frequency setting
potentiometer and external start signal) .......................................................... 71
3.3.4 Combined operation mode 1 (Operation using both external start signal and
operation panel)............................................................................................... 72
3.3.5 Combined operation mode 2 ........................................................................... 73
CHAPTER 4 PARAMETERS 75
4.1 Parameter List ...................................................................................................... 76

4.1.1 Parameter list .................................................................................................. 76
4.1.2 List of parameters classified by purpose of use .............................................. 82
4.1.3 Parameters recommended to be set by the user ............................................ 84
4.2 Parameter Function Details................................................................................. 85
4.2.1 Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46)............................................................................. 85
4.2.2 Output frequency range (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18)................................................... 86
4.2.3 Base frequency, base frequency voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47) ...................... 87
4.2.4 Multi-speed operation
(Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239).......................................... 88
4.2.5 Acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45) ..... 89
4.2.6 Electronic thermal relay function (Pr. 9, Pr. 48)............................................... 91
4.2.7 DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12)................................................................ 92
4.2.8 Starting frequency (Pr. 13) .............................................................................. 93
4.2.9 Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) ........................................................................ 94
4.2.10 Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16) .......................................................................... 95
4.2.11 Stall prevention and current restriction (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66, Pr. 156) .......... 96
4.2.12 Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29) ....................................................... 99
4.2.13 Regenerative brake duty (Pr. 30, Pr. 70)....................................................... 100
4.2.14 Frequency jump (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36) ................................................................. 101
4.2.15 Speed display (Pr. 37) ................................................................................... 102
4.2.16 Frequency at 5V (10V) input (Pr. 38)............................................................. 103
4.2.17 Frequency at 20mA input (Pr. 39) ................................................................. 103
4.2.18 Up-to-frequency sensitivity (Pr. 41) ............................................................... 104
4.2.19 Output frequency detection (Pr. 42, Pr. 43)................................................... 104
II
4.2.20 Monitor display (Pr. 52, Pr. 54)...................................................................... 105
Contents
4.2.21 Monitoring reference (Pr. 55, Pr. 56) ............................................................. 107
4.2.22 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
(Pr. 57, Pr. 58) ............................................................................................... 108
4.2.23 Remote setting function selection (Pr. 59)..................................................... 110
4.2.24 Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode (Pr. 60 to Pr. 63)........................... 113
4.2.25 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69) ......................................................... 115
4.2.26 Applied motor (Pr. 71) ................................................................................... 117
4.2.27 PWM carrier frequency and long wiring mode (Pr. 72, Pr. 240) .................... 118
4.2.28 Voltage input (Pr. 73)..................................................................................... 120
4.2.29 Input filter time constant (Pr. 74) ................................................................... 120
4.2.30 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75) ........ 121
4.2.31 Parameter write disable selection (Pr. 77)..................................................... 123
4.2.32 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78) .............................................. 124
4.2.33 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)................................................................. 124
4.2.34 General-purpose magnetic flux vector control selection (Pr. 80)................... 128
4.2.35 Offline auto tuning function (Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96) ......................... 129
4.2.36 Computer link operation (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124, Pr. 342) ................................... 135
4.2.37 PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134) ..................................................................... 148
4.2.38 Frequency setting command selection (Pr. 146) ........................................... 156
4.2.39 Output current detection function (Pr. 150, Pr. 151)...................................... 157
4.2.40 Zero current detection (Pr. 152, Pr. 153)....................................................... 158
4.2.41 User group selection (Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 176) ........................................ 159
4.2.42 Actual operation hour meter clear (Pr. 171) .................................................. 161
4.2.43 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183) .................................... 161
4.2.44 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192).................................. 163
4.2.45 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244) ...................................................... 164
4.2.46 Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247).......................................................... 165
4.2.47 Earth (ground) fault detection at start (Pr. 249)
(400V class does not have this function)....................................................... 166
4.2.48 Stop selection (Pr. 250) ................................................................................. 167
4.2.49 Output phase failure protection selection (Pr. 251) ....................................... 168
4.2.50 Capacitor life alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504) (No function for the 400V class)........ 169
4.2.51 Meter (frequency meter) calibration (Pr. 900)................................................ 170
4.2.52 Biases and gains of the frequency setting voltage (current)
and built-in frequency setting potentiometer
(Pr. 902 to Pr. 905, Pr. 922, Pr. 923)............................................................. 172
CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 185
5.1 Errors (Alarms) ................................................................................................... 186

5.1.1 Error (alarm) definitions ................................................................................. 186
5.1.2 To know the operating status at the occurrence of alarm.............................. 195
5.1.3 Correspondence between digital and actual characters................................ 195
III
5.1.4 Resetting the inverter .................................................................................... 195
5.2 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................. 196
5.2.1 Motor remains stopped.................................................................................. 196
5.2.2 Motor rotates in opposite direction ................................................................ 196
5.2.3 Speed greatly differs from the setting............................................................ 197
5.2.4 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth........................................................ 197
5.2.5 Motor current is large..................................................................................... 197
5.2.6 Speed does not increase............................................................................... 197
5.2.7 Speed varies during operation....................................................................... 197
5.2.8 Operation mode is not changed properly ...................................................... 198
5.2.9 Operation panel display is not operating ....................................................... 198
5.2.10 POWER lamp is not lit ................................................................................... 198
5.2.11 Parameter write cannot be performed ........................................................... 198
CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION 199
6.1 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection.................................................. 200

6.1.1 Precautions for maintenance and inspection................................................. 200
6.1.2 Check items................................................................................................... 200
6.1.3 Periodic inspection ........................................................................................ 200
6.1.4 Insulation resistance test using megger ........................................................ 201
6.1.5 Pressure test ................................................................................................. 201
6.1.6 Daily and periodic inspection......................................................................... 202
6.1.7 Replacement of parts .................................................................................... 205
6.1.8 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers ........................ 210
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS 213
7.1 Standard Specifications .................................................................................... 214

7.1.1 Model specifications ...................................................................................... 214
7.1.2 Common specifications ................................................................................. 218
7.1.3 Outline drawings............................................................................................ 220
APPENDIX 227
APPENDIX 1 Instruction Code List .......................................................................... 228

APPENDIX 2 When using the communication option. (400V class only)............. 232
IV
CHAPTER 1
OUTLINE
This chapter gives information on the basic "outline" of this
product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
Chapter 1
1.1 Pre-Operation Information ....................... 2

Chapter 2
1.2 Basic Configuration.................................. 4
1.3 Structure .................................................. 5
Chapter 3
<Abbreviations>
• PU
Operation panel and parameter
unit (FR-PU04)
• Inverter Chapter 4
Mitsubishi transistorized inverter
FR-E500 series
• Pr.
Parameter number
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
1
OUTLINE
1.1 Pre-Operation Information

1.1.1 Precautions for operation
This manual is written for the FR-E500 series transistorized inverters.
Incorrect handling may cause the inverter to operate incorrectly, causing its life to be
reduced considerably, or at the worst, the inverter to be damaged. Handle the inverter
properly in accordance with the information in each section as well as the precautions
and instructions of this manual to use it correctly.
For handling information on the parameter unit (FR-PU04), stand-alone options, etc.,
refer to the corresponding manuals.
(1) Unpacking and product check
Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate
on the inverter side face to ensure that the product agrees with your order and the
inverter is intact.
1) Inverter type
Capacity plate Rating plate
Rating plate MITSUBISHI INVERTER
MODEL
Capacity plate FR-E520-0.1K Inverter
Input rating INPUT : XXXXX
type
FR-E520-0.1K Output rating OUTPUT : XXXXX
Serial number SERIAL :
Inverter type Serial number PASSED
z Inverter type
FR - E520 - 0.1 K -
Symbol Voltage Class Symbol Protective Structure
Represents the
Three-phase None Enclosed-type
E520 inverter capacity
200V class Totally enclosed
"kW ".
Three-phase C structure
E540
400V class IP40
Single-phase
E520S
200V class
Single-phase
E510W
100V class
2) Accessory
Instruction manual
If you have found any discrepancy, damage, etc., please contact your sales
representative.
2
OUTLINE
(2) Preparation of instruments and parts required for operation
Instruments and parts to be prepared depend on how the inverter is operated. Prepare
equipment and parts as necessary. (Refer to page 58.)
(3) Installation
To operate the inverter with high performance for a long time, install the inverter in a
proper place, in the correct direction, with proper clearances. (Refer to page 14.)
(4) Wiring
Connect the power supply, motor and operation signals (control signals) to the terminal
block. Note that incorrect connection may damage the inverter and peripheral devices.
(See page 16.)
3
OUTLINE
1.2 Basic Configuration

1.2.1 Basic configuration
The following devices are required to operate the inverter. Proper peripheral devices
must be selected and correct connections made to ensure proper operation. Incorrect
system configuration and connections can cause the inverter to operate improperly, its
life to be reduced considerably, and in the worst case, the inverter to be damaged.
Please handle the inverter properly in accordance with the information in each section
as well as the precautions and instructions of this manual. (For connections of the
peripheral devices, refer to the corresponding manuals.)
Name Description
Use the power supply within the permissible power
Power supply supply specifications of the inverter. (Refer to page
214.)
(NFB)
Earth (ground)
or The breaker should be selected with care since a
leakage circuit
(ELB) breaker or no- large inrush current flows in the inverter at power
on. (Refer to page 48.)
fuse breaker
Install for your safety. (Refer to page 53.) Do not
Magnetic use this magnetic contactor to start or stop the
(MC) contactor inverter. It might reduce the inverter life. (Refer to
page 48.)
The reactors must be used when the power factor is
AC to be improved or the inverter is installed near a large
reactor Reactors
power supply system (500KVA or more and wiring
(FR-BAL) distance within 10m). Make selection carefully.
• The life of the inverter is influenced by ambient
DC reactor temperature. The ambient temperature should be
(FR-BEL) as low as possible within the permissible range.
This must be noted especially when the inverter is
Inverter installed in an enclosure. (Refer to page 14.)
• Wrong wiring might lead to damage of the
inverter. The control signal lines should be kept
away from the main circuit to protect them from
noise. (Refer to page 16.)
Do not connect a power capacitor, surge
Devices suppressor or radio noise filter on the output side.
Earth (ground) connected to When installing a no-fuse breaker on the output
the output side of the inverter, contact each manufacturer for
selection of the no-fuse breaker.
To prevent an electric shock, always earth
(ground) the motor and inverter.
For reduction of induction noise from the power
Earth (Ground) line of the inverter, it is recommended to wire the
earth (ground) cable by returning it to the earth
Earth (ground) (ground) terminal of the inverter. (Refer to page
45.)
Harmonic Suppression Guideline
The "harmonic suppression guideline for household appliances and general-purpose products"
was issued by Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry (formerly Ministry of International Trade
and Industry) in September, 1994. This guideline applies to the 3.7K* and less models of three-
phase 200V classes. By installing the power factor improving reactor (FR-BEL or FR-BAL),
inverters comply with the "harmonic suppression techniques for transistorized inverters (input
current 20A or less)" established by the Japan Electrical Manufacturers' Association.
* For the single-phase 200V class, the guideline applies to 2.2kW and less models.
For the single-phase 100V class, the guideline applies to 0.75kW and less models.
4
OUTLINE
1.3 Structure
1.3.1 Appearance and structure
(1) Front view

(100V class, 200V class) (400V class)
Operation panel front cover

Operation panel
Built-in frequency setting potentiometer

Capacity plate
Front cover
Rating plate
1
Wiring cover Wiring port cover
for option
(2) Without front cover and operation panel front cover

Inboard option
mounting position
Connector for connection
of inboard option
(400V class only)
Control circuit terminal block
Control logic changing
jumper connector
(400V class only)
Main circuit
terminal block
Wiring cover
(3) Without operation panel
PU connector
POWER lamp (yellow)
ALARM lamp (red)
Lamp indication
Power lamp .......Lit when power is spplied to the main circuit (R (L1),S (L2),T (L3)).
Alarm lamp........Lit when the inverter is in the alarm status (major faults).
5
OUTLINE
1.3.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover
zRemoval
(For the FR-E520-0.1K to 3.7K, FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.75K, FR-E510W-
0.1K to 0.75K)
The front cover is secured by hooks in positions A and B as shown below.
Push either A or B in the direction of arrows, and using the other end as a support,
pull the front cover toward you to remove.
1) 2) 3)
A
B
Overhead cross-sectional view
A B
Front cover
(For the FR-E520-5.5K, 7.5K)
The front cover is fixed with hooks in positions A, B and C.
Push A and B in the directions of arrows at the same time and remove the cover
using C as supporting points.
1) 2) 3)
A B
C C
6
OUTLINE
(For the FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K)

The front cover is fixed with hooks in positions A, B and C.
Push A and B in the directions of arrows at the same time and remove the cover
using C as supporting points.
1) 2) 3)
A B
C C 1
zReinstallation
When reinstalling the front cover after wiring, fix the hooks securely.
With the front cover removed, do not switch power on.
Note: 1. Make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely.
2. The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover
and the rating plate of the inverter. Before reinstalling the front cover, check
the serial numbers to ensure that the cover removed is reinstalled to the
inverter from where it was removed.
7
OUTLINE
1.3.3 Removal and reinstallation of the wiring cover
zRemoval
(For the FR-E520-0.1K to 7.5K, FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.75K, FR-E510W-
0.1K to 0.75K)
The wiring cover is fixed by hooks in positions 1) and 2).
Push either 1) or 2) in the direction of arrows and pull the wiring cover downward to
remove.
1) 2)
Wiring hole

Remove the wiring cover by pulling it in the direction of arrow A.
Wiring hole
zReinstallation
Pass the cables through the wiring hole and reinstall the cover in the original
position.
8
OUTLINE
1.3.4 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel
To ensure safety, remove and reinstall the operation panel after switching power off.
The charging area and control printed board are exposed on the rear surface of the
operation panel. When removing the operation panel, always fit the rear cover option FR-
E5P. Never touch the control printed board because touching it can cause the inverter to fail
zRemoval
Hold down the portion A indicated by the arrow and lift the right hand side using
the portion B indicated by the arrow as a support, and pull out the operation panel
to the right.
1) B 3)
2)
A
1
(If the above procedure is not used for removal, the internal connector may be
damaged by the force applied.)
z Reinstallation
Insert the mounting hook (left hand side) of the operation panel into the mounting
position of the inverter and push in the right hand side mounting hook to install the
operation panel.
Mounting position
Operation panel
Hook
A
1) 2) 3)
9
OUTLINE
zUsing the connection cable for operation

1) Remove the operation panel.
2) Fit the rear cover option FR-E5P to the back surface of the operation panel.
3) Securely plug one end of the connection cable into the PU connector of the
inverter and the other end into the adaptor of the FR-E5P option to connect it to
the operation panel. (For the connection cable of the FR-E5P, refer to page 29.)
PU connector
(RS-485 cable specifications)
zMounting the operation panel on an enclosure

When you open the operation panel front cover, the screw mounting guides for
fixing the operation panel to an enclosure appear on the top left and bottom right.
Remove the operation panel, fit the rear cover of the FR-E5P option, drill holes in
the operation panel mounting guides, and securely mount the operation panel on
the enclosure with screws.
1.3.5 Removal of the operation panel front cover

1)Open the operation panel front cover to 90 degrees.
2)Pull out the operation panel front cover to the left to remove it.
90 degrees
10
OUTLINE
1.3.6 Exploded view
z FR-E520-0.1K to 7.5K
z FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.75K
z FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K
Operation panel
Wiring cover
Front cover
z FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K
Operation panel
Front cover
Wiring port cover

for option
Wiring cover
CAUTION
Do not remove any parts other than the operation panel, front cover, and wiring cover
from the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter.
11
MEMO
12
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION AND
WIRING
This chapter gives information on the basic "installation and
wiring" for use of this product.
Always read the instructions in this chapter before using the
equipment. Chapter 1
2.1 Installation................................................ 14
Chapter 2
2.2 Wiring....................................................... 16
2.3 Other Wiring............................................. 38
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
13
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.1 Installation
2.1.1 Instructions for installation
The FR-E520(S)-0.1K to 0.75K and FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.4K have top mounting holes
in the back of the operation panel front cover. Tighten the screws after opening the
cover.
1) Handle the unit carefully.

The inverter uses plastic parts. Handle it gently to protect it from damage.
Also, hold the unit with even strength and do not apply too much strength to the front
cover alone.
2) Install the inverter in a place where it is not affected by vibration easily (5.9m/s2
maximum).
Note the vibration of a cart, press, etc.
3) Note on the ambient temperature.

The inverter life is under great influence of the ambient temperature. In the place of
installation, the ambient temperature must be within the permissible range -10°C to
+50°C (-10°C to +40°C when using the totally enclosed structure). Check that the
ambient temperature is within that range in the positions shown in figure 3).
4) Install the inverter on a non-combustible surface.

The inverter will be very hot (maximum about 150°C). Install it on a non-combustible
surface (e.g. metal). Also leave sufficient clearances around the inverter.
5) Avoid high temperature and high humidity.

Avoid direct sunlight and places of high temperature and high humidity.
6) Avoid places where the inverter is exposed to oil mist, flammable gases, fluff, dust,
dirt etc.
Install the inverter in a clean place or inside a "totally enclosed" panel which does not
accept any suspended matter.
14
7) Note the cooling method when the inverter is installed in an enclosure.
When two or more inverters are installed or a ventilation fan is mounted in an
enclosure, the inverters and ventilation fan must be installed in proper positions with
extreme care taken to keep the ambient temperatures of the inverters with the
permissible values. If they are installed in improper positions, the ambient
temperatures of the inverters will rise and ventilation effect will be reduced.
8) Install the inverter securely in the vertical direction with screws or bolts.
4) Clearances around the inverter

3) Note on ambient
temperatures 10cm Leave sufficient
or more clearances above Cooling air
and under the
inverter to ensure
adequate ventilation.
Measurement Cooling fan
1cm or FR-E500 1cm or
position built in the
more* more*
5cm FR-E500 inverter
5cm 10cm
or more
5cm Measurement position *5cm or more for 5.5K and 7.5K
These clearances are also necessary for changing 2
the cooling fan.
(The 0.75K or more for 200V class and the 1.5K or
more for 400V class are provided with a cooling fan.)
7) For installation in an enclosure

Ventilation
fan
Inverter
Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter
Inverter
(Correct example) (Incorrect example) Built-in cooling fan
Position of Ventilation Fan
(Correct example) (Incorrect example)
When more than one inverter is contained
8) Vertical mounting
15
2.2 Wiring
2.2.1 Terminal connection diagram
z 3-phase 200V power input
z 3-phase 400V power input
NFB MC Motor
3-phase AC R(L1) U
V IM
power supply S(L2) W
T(L3) Earth
24VDC power output and
PC P1 Jumper (ground)
external transistor common
Note 5 Remove this jumper when
(+)P
using the optional power-factor
PR improving DC reactor.
Forward rotation start STF (-)N
Note 2 Brake resistor connection
Reverse rotation start STR
High RH
Multi-speed selection Middle RM A
B Alarm
Low RL
output
Output stop MRS C
Reset RES
Contact input common SD RUN Running
Note 4
FU Frequency detection Open
Control input signals
(No voltage input allowed) SE Open collector collector outputs
Note 3 output common
Frequency setting signals (Analog)
10(+5V) Meter
(Note 1) 3
2 (e.g. frequency meter)
Frequency 2 0 to 5VDC Selected + -
setting 0 to 10VDC FM
1 Moving-coil type
potentiometer 5(Common) Calibration 1mA full-scale
1/2W1kΩ Current input(-) Note 4 resistor (Note 6)
SD
4 to 20mADC(+) 4(4 to 20mADC) Note 3
When using current input as the

PU connector Earth
frequency setting signal, set "4" in
any of Pr.180 to Pr.183 (input (RS-485) (ground)
terminal function selection) and Operation panel Main circuit terminal
assign AU (current input selection) Control circuit input terminal
(With frequency setting
to any of terminal RH, RM, RL, or
MRS, then turn the AU signal on. potentiometer) Control circuit output terminal
Note: 1. If the potentiometer is to be operated often, use a 2W1kΩ potentiometer.

2. 0.1K and 0.2K do not contain a transistor.
3. Terminals SD and SE are isolated.
4. Terminals SD and 5 are common terminals. Do not earth (ground) them to the
ground. Terminals SD and 5 are not isolated. (Those of the 400V class are isolated.)
5. When terminals PC-SD are used as a 24VDC power supply, be careful not
to short these terminals. If they are shorted, the inverter will be damaged.
6. Not needed when the operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04) is used for
calibration. Used when calibration must be made near the frequency meter for
such a reason as a remote frequency meter. However, the frequency meter
needle may not deflect to full-scale if the calibration resistor is connected. In this
case, use this resistor and the operation panel or parameter unit together.
16
z Single-phase 200V power input
z Single-phase 100V power input
NFB MC
Motor
R U
Power supply S V IM
W
Earth
(ground)
Note: 1. To ensure safety, connect the power input to the inverter via a magnetic
contactor and earth (ground) leakage circuit breaker or no-fuse breaker, and
use the magnetic contactor to switch power on-off.
2. The output is three-phase 200V.
(1) Description of the main circuit terminals

Symbol Terminal Name Description
Connect to the commercial power supply. Keep these
R, S, T
terminals open when using the high power factor
(L1, L2, L3) AC power input 2
converter (FR-HC) or power regeneration common
(Note)
converter (FR-CV).
U, V, W Inverter output Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.
Brake resistor Connect the optional brake resistor across terminals P-
P (+), PR
connection PR (+ - PR) (not for 0.1K and 0.2K).
Connect the optional brake unit, high power factor
Brake unit
P (+), N (-) converter (FR-HC), and power regeneration common
connection
converter (FR-CV).
Power factor Disconnect the jumper from terminals P-P1 (+ - P1) and
improving connect the optional power factor improving DC reactor.
P (+), P1
DC reactor (can not be connected to the single phase 100V power
connection input specification inverter)
For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be
Earth (Ground)
earthed (grounded).
Note: R, S (L1, L2) terminals for single-phase power input.
17
(2) Description of the control circuit terminals
Terminal
Type Symbol Description
Name
Forward Turn on the STF signal to start forward When the STF
STF
rotation start rotation and turn it off to stop. and STR signals
are turned on
Reverse Turn on the STR signal to start reverse simultaneously,
STR the stop command
rotation start rotation and turn it off to stop.
is given.
RH, RM, Multi-speed Combine the RH, RM and RL signals as Input terminal
Contact input
RL selection appropriate to select multiple speeds. function selection

Turn on the MRS signal (20ms or longer) (Pr. 180 to Pr.
to stop the inverter output. 183) changes
MRS Output stop
Used to shut off the inverter output to bring the terminal
motor to a stop by the electromagnetic brake. functions.
Input signals
Used to reset the protective circuit activated. Turn on the

RES signal for more than 0.1s then turn it off.
Factory setting is for reset always. By setting Pr.75, reset
RES Reset
can be set to enabled only at an inverter alarm occurrence.
(Refer to page 121.) Recover about 1s after reset is
cancelled.
Contact input Common to the contact input terminals and terminal FM.
SD common Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power output (PC
(sink*) terminal).
Power output
and external When transistor output (open collector output), such as a
transistor programmable controller (PLC), is connected, connect the
PC common external power supply common for transistor output to this
Contact input terminal to prevent a fault caused by undesirable current.
common This terminal can be used as a 24VDC, 0.1A power output.
(source*)
Frequency
10 setting power 5VDC, permissible load current 10mA
supply
Frequency setting
By entering 0 to 5VDC (0 to 10VDC), the maximum

Frequency output frequency is reached at 5V (or 10V) and I/O
2 setting are proportional. Use Pr. 73 to switch between input 0
(voltage) to 5VDC (factory setting) and 0 to 10VDC. Input
Analog
resistance 10kΩ. Maximum permissible voltage 20V.

By entering 4 to 20mADC, the maximum output frequency is
Frequency reached at 20mA and I/O are proportional. This input signal
4 setting is valid only when the AU signal (Note) is on (voltage input is
(current) invalid). Input resistance approximately 250Ω. Maximum
permissible current 30mA.
Frequency
Common to the frequency setting signals (terminal 2, 1 or 4).
5 setting
Do not connect to the earth (ground).
common
Note: Assign the AU signal to any of the terminals using the input terminal function
selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183).
* Used as a contact input signal common terminal by switching between sink logic and
source logic. (Refer to page 26.)
18
Terminal
Type Symbol Description
Name
Change-over contact output indicating that
the output has been stopped by the inverter
Contact
protective function activated. 230VAC 0.3A,

A, B, C Alarm output 30VDC 0.3A. Alarm: discontinuity across B-
C (continuity across A-C), normal:
continuity across B-C (discontinuity across
Output
A-C).
terminal
Switched low when the inverter output function
frequency is equal to or higher than the selection
Inverter starting frequency (factory set to 0.5Hz, (Pr. 190 to
RUN
running variable). Switched high during stop or DC Pr. 192)
Open collector
injection brake operation (*1). changes

Output signals
Permissible load 24VDC 0.1A. terminal

functions.
Switched low when the output frequency
has reached or exceeded the detection
Frequency frequency set as appropriate. Switched
FU
detection high when the output frequency is below
the detection frequency (*1).
Permissible load 24VDC 0.1A 2
Open collector
SE Common to the RUN and FU terminals
output common
One selected from output
frequency, motor current Factory setting of output
and output voltage is output item:
Pulse
FM For meter (*2). The output signal is Frequency permissible

proportional to the load current 1mA
magnitude of each 1440 pulses/s at 60Hz
monitoring item.
With the operation panel connector, communication can
Communication
be made using the RS-485 protocol.

RS-485
• Conforming Standard : EIA Standard RS-485

 PU connector
• Transmission format : Multi-drop link system
• Communication speed : Maximum 19200bps
• Overall length : 500m
*1: Low indicates that the open collector output transistor is on (conducts). High
indicates that the transistor is off (does not conduct).
*2: Not output during inverter resetting.
19
2.2.2 Wiring of the Main Circuit
(1) Wiring instructions
1) It is recommended to use insulation-sleeved crimping terminals for power supply and
motor cables.
2) Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage the
inverter. Never perform such wiring.
3) After wiring, wire off-cuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire off-cuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in a control box etc., be careful so that chips and others
do not enter the inverter.
4) Use thick cables to make the voltage drop 2% or less.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage
drop will cause the motor torque to decrease, especially at the output of a low frequency.
(A selection example for the wiring length of 20m is shown on page 23.)
5) For long distance wiring, the overcurrent protection may be activated improperly or
the devices connected to the output side may misoperate or become faulty under the
influence of a charging current due to the stray capacitance of the wiring.
Therefore, the maximum overall wiring length should be as indicated in the following
table. If the wiring length exceeds the value, it is recommended to set "1" in Pr. 156 to
make the high-response current limit function invalid. (When two or more motors are
connected to the inverter, the total wiring length should be within the indicated value.)
Inverter 3.7K or
0.1K 0.2K 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K
Capacity more
100V,
Non-low 200 200 300 500 500 500 500
200V
acoustic
class
noise
400V
mode —— —— 200 200 300 500 500
class
100V,
Low 30 100 200 300 500 500 500
200V
acoustic
class
noise
400V
mode —— —— 30 100 200 300 500
class
(Unit: m)
Overall wiring length (3.7K or more)
500m maximum
300m
300m
300m+300m=600m
20
6) Connect only the recommended optional brake resistor between the terminals P-PR
(+ - PR). Keep terminals P-PR (+ - PR) of 0.1K or 0.2K open.
These terminals must not be shorted.
0.1K and 0.2K do not accept the brake resistor. Keep terminals P-PR (+ - PR) open.
Also, never short these terminals.
7) Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes harmonic components, which
may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the
inverter. In this case, install the FR-BIF optional radio noise filter (for use in the input
side only) or FR-BSF01 or FR-BLF line noise filter to minimize interference.
8) Do not install a power capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter (FR-BIF option)
on the output side of the inverter.
This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be
damaged. If any of the above devices are installed, immediately remove them. (When
using the FR-BIF radio noise filter with a single-phase power supply, connect it to the
input side of the inverter after isolating the T phase securely.)
9) When rewiring after operation, make sure that the POWER lamp has gone off, and
when more than 10 minutes has elapsed after power-off, check with a meter etc. that
the voltage is zero. After that, start rewiring work. For some time after power-off, there
is a dangerous voltage in the capacitor.
Notes on Earthing (Grounding)
z Leakage currents flow in the inverter. To prevent an electric shock, the inverter and
2
motor must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (grounding) must conform to the
requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes.
(JIS, NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
z Use the dedicated earth (ground) terminal to earth (ground) the inverter. (Do not
use the screw in the case, chassis, etc.) For the earth (ground) connection, avoid
direct contact between aluminium and copper. Tin-plated cable lugs can be used if
the plating does not contain zinc. When tightening the screws, take care not to
damage the thread in the aluminium frame.
z Use the thickest possible earth (ground) cable. Use the cable whose size is equal
to or greater than that indicated below, and minimize the cable length. The earthing
(grounding) point should be as near as possible to the inverter.
(Unit: mm2)
Earth (ground) Cable Gauge

Motor Capacity
100V class 200V class 400V class
2.2kW or less 2 (2.5) 2 (2.5) 2 (2.5)
3.7kW — 3.5 (4) 2 (4)
5.5kW, 7.5kW — 5.5 (6) 3.5 (4)
For use as a product compliant with the Low Voltage Directive, use PVC cable
whose size is indicated within parentheses.
z Earth (ground) the motor on the inverter side using one wire of the 4-core cable.
21
(2) Terminal block layout of the power circuit

FR-E520-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K, 0.75K FR-E520-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K
N/- P1 P/+ PR N/- P/+
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U V W PR P1

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U V W
TB1 TB2
Screw size (M3.5) Screw size (M4) TB1
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M3.5)
Screw size (M4)
FR-E520-5.5K, 7.5K
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P1 P/+ PR U V W
TB1
Screw size
Screw size (M5)
(M5)
FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K
N/- P1 P/+ PR
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U V W

TB1
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M4)
FR-E520S-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K FR-E520S-0.75K

FR-E510W-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K FR-E510W-0.75K
N/- P1 P/+ PR N/- P/+
R/L1 S/L2 U V W PR P1
R/L1 S/L2 U V W
TB1 TB2
Screw size (M3.5) Screw size (M4) TB1
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M3.5)
Screw size (M4)
22
(3) Cables, crimping terminals, etc.
The following table lists the cables and crimping terminals used with the inputs (R (L1), S
(L2), T (L3)) and outputs (U, V, W) of the inverter and the torques for tightening the screws:
1) FR-E520-0.1K to 7.5K
PVC insulated
Tight- Crimping HIV Cables
Terminal Cables
Applicable Inverter ening Terminals
Screw mm2 AWG mm 2
Type Torque
Size R, S, T R, S, T R, S, T R, S, T
N⋅m U, V, W U, V, W U, V, W U, V, W
(L1, L2, L3) (L1, L2, L3) (L1, L2, L3) (L1, L2, L3)
FR-E520-0.1K to
M3.5 1.2 2-3.5 2-3.5 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
0.75K
FR-E520-1.5K,
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
2.2K
FR-E520-3.7K M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 2.5
FR-E520-5.5K M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 4
FR-E520-7.5K M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 6 8 16 6
2) FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K
PVC insulated
Terminal Cables
Applicable Inverter ening
Type
Screw
Torque
Terminals
mm2 AWG mm 2 2
Size R, S, T R, S, T R, S, T R, S, T
(L1, L2, L3) (L1, L2, L3) (L1, L2, L3) (L1, L2, L3)
FR-E540-0.4K M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
FR-E540-0.75K M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
FR-E540-1.5K M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
FR-E540-2.2K M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
FR-E540-3.7K M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
FR-E540-5.5K M4 1.5 5.5-4 2-4 3.5 2 12 14 4 2.5
FR-E540-7.5K M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4
3) FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.75K
PVC insulated
Terminal Cables
Screw mm2 AWG mm 2
Type Torque
Size R, S R, S R, S R, S
(L1, L2) (L1, L2) (L1, L2) (L1, L2)
FR-E520S-0.1K to
M3.5 1.2 2-3.5 2-3.5 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
0.4K
FR-E520S-0.75K M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
23
4) FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K
PVC insulated
Terminal Cables
Type
Screw
Torque mm2 AWG mm 2
Size R, S R, S R, S R, S
(L1, L2) (L1, L2) (L1, L2) (L1, L2)
FR-E510W-0.1K
M3.5 1.2 2-3.5 2-3.5 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
to 0.4K
FR-E510W-0.75K M4 1.5 5.5-4 2-4 3.5 2 12 14 4 2.5
Note: 1. The cables used should be 75°C copper cables.

2. Tighten the terminal screws to the specified torques.
Undertightening can cause a short or misoperation.
Overtightening can cause the screws and unit to be damaged, resulting in a
short or misoperation.
(4) Connection of the power supply and motor

z Three-phase power input
Three-phase
power supply 200V R S T
Three-phase U V W Earth (ground)
(L1) (L2) (L3) terminal
power supply 400V
Motor
R S T U V W
No-fuse (L1) (L2) (L3) Earth
(ground)
breaker
The power supply cables must be connected Connect the motor to U, V, W. In the above
to R, S, T (L1, L2 ,L3). If they are connected to connection, turning on the forward rotation switch (signal)
U, V, W, the inverter will be damaged. rotates the motor in the counterclockwise (arrow) direction
(Phase sequence need not be matched.) when viewed from the load shaft.
z Single-phase power input

Single-phase power
supply 200V
R S Earth (ground)
Single-phase power U V W
(L1) (L2) terminal
supply 100V
Motor
R S U V W
(L1) (L2) Earth
No-fuse (ground)
breaker
Note: 1.To ensure safety, connect the power input to the inverter via a
magnetic contactor and earth (ground) leakage circuit breaker
or no-fuse breaker, and use the magnetic contactor to switch
power on-off.
2.The output is three-phase 200V.
24
2.2.3 Wiring of the control circuit
(1) Wiring instructions
1) Terminals SD, SE and 5 are common to the I/O signals. These common terminals must
not be earthed (grounded) to the ground.
Terminals SD and 5 are not isolated. Do not connect terminals SE-5. (Those of the 400V
class are isolated. Avoid connecting the terminal SD and 5 and the terminal SE and 5.)
2) Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run them
away from the main and power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit).
3) The frequency input signals to the control circuit are micro currents. When contacts
are required, use two or more parallel micro signal contacts or a twin contact to
prevent a contact fault.
4) It is recommended to use the cables of 0.3mm2 to 0.75mm2 gauge for connection to
the control circuit terminals.
(2) Terminal block layout

In the control circuit of the inverter, the terminals are arranged as shown below:
Terminal screw size: M2.5
(200V class, 100V class) Terminal layout of control circuit (400V class)
2
RH A
RM B
RL C
MRS 10
RES 2
SD 5
FM 4
PC SD
SE STF
RUN STR
FU SD
(3) Wiring method

1) For wiring the control circuit, use cables after stripping their sheaths.
Refer to the gauge printed on the inverter and strip the sheaths to the following
dimensions. If the sheath is stripped too much, its cable may be shorted with the
adjoining cable. If the sheath is stripped too little, the cable may come off.
7mm±1mm
25
2) When using bar terminals and solid wires for wiring, their diameters should be 0.9mm
maximum. If they are larger, the threads may be damaged during tightening.
3) Loosen the terminal screw and insert the cable into the terminal.
4) Tighten the screw to the specified torque.
Undertightening can cause cable disconnection or misoperation. Overtightening can
cause damage to the screw or unit, leading to short circuit or misoperation.
Tightening torque: 0.25N⋅m to 0.49N⋅m
*Use a size 0 screwdriver to tighten.
Note: When routing the stripped cables, twist them so that they do not become loose.
In addition, do not solder it.
(4) Control logic changing

The input signal logic is factory-set to the sink logic.
To change the control logic, the position of the jumper connector must be changed.
1) Use tweezers etc. to remove the jumper connector in the sink logic position and fit it
in the source logic position.
Do this position changing before switching power on.
Jumper Jumper
connector connector
(100V/200V class) (400V class)
Note: 1. Make sure that the front cover has been installed securely.
2. The front cover has a capacity plate and the inverter a rating plate on it.
Since these plates have the same serial numbers, always reinstall the
removed cover to the inverter from where it was removed.
3. Always install the sink-source logic changing jumper connector in either of
the positions. If two connectors are installed in these positions at the same
time, the inverter may be damaged.
26
2) Sink logic type
• In this logic, a signal switches on when a current flows out of the corresponding signal
input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the
open collector output signals.
Inverter AX40
Current R
STF RUN 1
R
R R
STR
SD SE 9
24VDC
• Use terminal PC as a common terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by

undesirable current.
(Do not connect terminal SD of the inverter with terminal 0V of the external power
supply. When using terminals PC-SD as a 24VDC power supply, do not install the
power supply in parallel outside the inverter. Doing so may cause misoperation due to 2
undesirable current.)
AY40 type Inverter

transistor output
module STF 24VDC
1
(SD)
2 STR
9
PC
10
24VDC SD
Current flow
27
3) Source logic type
• In this logic, a signal switches on when a current flows into the corresponding signal
input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the
open collector output signals.
PC Inverter AX80
RUN 1
Current R
STF
R
R SE
STR
24VDC
9
R
• When using an external power supply for transistor output, use terminal SD as a
common to prevent misoperation caused by undesirable current.
AY-80 type
transistor output Inverter
module.
9 PC
24VDC
1 STF (SD)
2 STR
24VDC
10 SD
Current flow
(5) How to use the STOP signal

The following connection example shows how to self-hold the start signals (forward
rotation, reverse rotation).
Use Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection) to assign the STOP signal.
RL
(STOP)
MRS
Stop
RES
SD
Forward
rotation
STF
Reverse
STR
rotation (Wiring example for sink logic)
28
2.2.4 Connection to the PU connector
(1) When connecting the operation panel or parameter unit using a cable
Use the option FR-CB2 or the following connector and commercially available
cable:
<Connection cable>
• Connector: RJ45 connector
Example: 5-554720-3, Tyco Electronics Corporation
• Cable: :Cable conforming to EIA568 (e.g. 10BASE-T cable)
Example: SGLPEV-T 0.5mm×4P (Twisted pair cable, 4 pairs),
MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES, LTD.
Note: The rear cover and junction adaptor are required since the circuit board is
exposed in the back of the operation panel. Use the FR-E5P option (cover and
adaptor available as a set).
<Maximum wiring length>

• Operation panel: 20m
• Parameter unit (FR-PU04): 20m
2
(2) For RS-485 communication
With the operation panel disconnected, the PU
connector can be used for communication operation
from a personal computer etc.
When the PU connector is connected with a personal,
FA or other computer by a communication cable, a
user program can run and monitor the inverter or read
1) SG 5) SDA
and write to the parameters. 2) P5S 6) RDB
3) RDA 7) SG
<PU connector pin-outs> 4) SDB 8) P5S
Viewed from the inverter (receptacle side) front 8) to 1)
Note: 1. Do not connect the PU connector to a computer's LAN board, FAX modem
socket or telephone modular connector. Otherwise, the product may be
damaged due to electrical specification differences.
2. Pins 2) and 8) (P5S) provide power to the operation panel or parameter
unit.
Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication.
3. Refer to page 135 for the communication parameters.
29
<System configuration example>
(1) Connection of a computer to the inverter (1:1 connection)
Station 0 Computer Station 0

Computer
Inverter RS-232C Inverter
connector
RS-485 RS-485
RS-232C connector
connector Max. 15m
RS-485 cable
interface/ RS-232C RS-485
terminal converter
RJ-45 connector 2) RJ-45 connector 2)
10BASE-T cable 1) 10BASE-T cable 1)
z Computer-inverter connection cable
For a connection cable between the computer having RS-232C and the inverter (RS-
232C⇔RS-485 converter), refer to the table below.
Example of product available on the market (as of Oct., 2003)
Model Maker
FA-T-RS40* Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
* The converter cable cannot connect two or more inverters (the computer and
inverter are connected on a 1:1 basis). Since the product is packed with the RS-
232C cable and RS-485 cable (10BASE-T + RJ-45 connector), the cable and
connector need not be prepared separately. Contact a maker for details of the
product.
REMARKS
Refer to the following when fabricating the cable on the user side.
Product Model Maker
SGLPEV-T 0.5mm × 4P
1) 10BASE-T cable * Do not use No. 2 and No. 8 Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
pin (P5S).
2) RJ-45 connector 5-554720-3 Tyco Electronics Corporation
30
(2) Connection of a computer to multiple inverters (1:n connection)
Station n
Station 0 Station 1 (Max. 32 inverters)
Computer
Inverter Inverter Inverter
RS-485 RS-485 RS-485
connector connector connector
RS-485
interface/
terminal
Distributor 3)
Termination resistor
10BASE-T cable 1) RJ-45 connector 2)
Station 1 Station 2 Station n
Computer
RS-232C
connector RS-485 RS-485 RS-485
connector connector connector
RS-232C Max. 15m
cable
Converter
Distributor
3)
Termination resistor
10BASE-T cable 1) RJ-45 connector 2)
REMARKS 2
Refer to the following when fabricating the cable on the user side.
Product Model Maker
1) 10BASE-T cable SGLPEV-T 0.5mm × 4P* Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
2) RJ-45 connector 5-554720-3 Tyco Electronics Corporation
* Do not use No. 2 and No. 8 pin (P5S) of the 10 BASE-T cable.
31
<Wiring methods>
1) Wiring of one RS-485 computer and one inverter
Computer Side Terminals Cable connection and signal direction Inverter
Signal name Description PU connector
10 BASE-T Cable
RDA Receive data SDA
RDB Receive data SDB
SDA Send data RDA
SDB Send data RDB
RSA Request to send
RSB Request to send
(Note 1)
CSA Clear to send
CSB Clear to send
0.3mm2 or more
SG Signal ground SG
FG Frame ground
2) Wiring of one RS-485 computer and "n" inverters (several inverters)

Cable connection and signal direction
Computer 10 BASE-T Cable

RDA
RDB
Termination
SDA
resistor
SDB (Note 2)
RSA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
RSB
(Note 1)
CSA
CSB
SG SG SG SG
FG Station 1 Station 2 Station n
Note: 1. Make connections in accordance with the instruction manual of the

computer used.
Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer as they differ between
models.
2. There may be the influence of reflection depending on the transmission
speed and/or transmission distance. If this reflection hinders
communication, provide a termination resistor. If the PU connector is used
to make a connection, use the distributor as a termination resistor cannot
be fitted.
Connect the termination resistor to only the inverter remotest from the
computer. (Termination resistor: 100Ω)
32
2.2.5 Connection of stand-alone option units
The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required.
Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or an accident. Connect and operate
the option unit carefully in accordance with the corresponding option unit manual.
(1) Connection of the dedicated external brake resistor (option)

(Cannot be connected to 0.1K and 0.2K)
Connect a brake resistor across terminals P (+) and PR. Connect a dedicated brake
resistor only.
(For the locations of terminals P (+) and PR, refer to the terminal block layout (page
22).)
• FR-E520-0.4K, 0.75K, 5.5K, 7.5K • FR-E520-1.5K to 3.7K

• FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K • FR-E520S-0.75K
• FR-E520S-0.4K • FR-E510W-0.75K
• FR-E510W-0.4K
N(-) P1 P(+) PR P
Brake resistor
PR
Brake resistor
2
33
(2) Connection of the brake unit (BU)
Connect the BU brake unit correctly as shown below. Incorrect connection will damage
the inverter. Remove the jumper across terminals HB-PC and terminals TB-HC of the
brake unit and fit it to across terminals PC-TB.
NFB MC Inverter
R (L1) Motor
U
Power
S (L2) V IM
supply
T (L3) W
T(Note 3) P (+) N (-)
MC
ON Discharge resistor
OFF
Connect a MC Remove
jumper. jumpers.
PC HA HB HC TB P PR N
OCR OCR
BU type brake unit
Note: 1. The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit and discharge resistor
should be within 2m. If twisted wires are used, the distance should be within
5m.
2. If the transistors in the brake unit should fail, the resistor will be extremely
hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a magnetic contactor on the inverter's
power supply side to shut off current in case of failure.
3. When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
34
(3) Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC)
(In the case of single-phase power input, the FR-HC cannot be connected.)
When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC) to suppress power supply
harmonics, perform wiring securely as shown below. Wrong connection will damage the
high power factor converter and inverter.
High power
External box factor converte r Inverter
(FR-HCB) (FR-HC) (FR-E500)
MC1 MC1
Resistor MC2 R (L1)
Reactor 1 Reactor 2 MC2
S (L2)
(FR-HCL01) (FR-HCL02) T (L3)
NFB MC R3 (Note 6) (Note 2)
R2 Motor
Power R R2 R3 R4 R4 P P (+)
S2 U
supply S S2 T2 MC S3
T3
S3 S4 S4 N N (-) V IM
T T2 T3 T4 T4 RDY MRS W
RSO RES
R SE SD
Filter S Phase
capacitor Resistor T detection
Note: 1. Use sink logic (factory setting) when the FR-HC is connected. The FR-HC
cannot be connected when source logic is selected.
2. The power input terminals R, S, T (L1, L2, L3) must be open. 2
Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Reverse polarity of terminals
N (-), P (+) will damage the inverter.
3. The voltage phases of terminals R, S, T (L1, L2, L3) and terminals R4, S4,
T4 must be matched before connection.
4. The MRS terminal functions can be changed using Pr.183 "MRS terminal
function selection". When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-
HC), use the inverter with "6" (factory-set) in Pr.183. (Refer to page 161.)
5. If the load capacity is less than half of the high power factor converter
capacity, satisfactory harmonic suppression effects cannot be produced.
6. Do not install the NFB between terminals P-N (P (+) -P, N (-) -N).
(4) Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (FR-BEL)

Connect the FR-BEL power <Connection method>
factor improving DC reactor • FR-E520-0.1K to 0.75K, 5.5K, 7.5K • FR-E520-1.5K to 3.7K
between terminals P1-P (+). • FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K • FR-E520S-0.75K
• FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.4K
In this case, the jumper
N P P
connected across terminals ( ) P1 (+) PR (+)
Remove
FR-BEL the jumper.
P1-P (+) must be removed. P1
FR-BEL
Otherwise, the reactor will
not function. Remove the jumper.
Note: 1. The wiring distance should be within 5m.

2. The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the
power supply cables (R (L1), S (L2), T (L3)).
35
(5) Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
When connecting the type power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), connect the
inverter terminals (P(+), N(-)) and power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
terminals as shown below so that their signals match with each other. For details, refer
to the instruction manual of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).
R (L1) U
S (L2) (Note 2)
T (L3) V IM
W
Dedicated stand-alone FR-CV power regenerative

Inverter
reactor (FR-CVL) common converter
NFB MC1
R/L11 R2/L12
3-phase R2/L1 (Note 5)
S/L21 S2/L22
AC power S2/L2 P/L+ P (+)
T/L31 T2/L32 (Note 2)
supply T2/L3 N/L- N (-)
(Note 3)
P24 PC
R/L11 SD
SD
S/L21
RDYA
T/MC1
(Note 6) RDYB MRS (Note 4)
RSO RES
SE SD
Note: 1. When the FR-CV is connected, use sink logic (factory setting). For source
logic, the FR-CV cannot be connected.
2. The DC power supply input from the terminals P (+) and N (-) is used as the
control power supply. The power input terminals R (L1), S (L2), T (L3) must
be open. Accidental connection will damage the inverter. Opposite polarity
of terminals N (-), P (+) will damage the inverter.
3. The voltage phases of terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1 and terminals R2/L1,
S2/L2, T2/L3 must be matched before connection.
4. The MRS terminal functions can be changed using Pr.183 "MRS terminal
function selection". When connecting the power regeneration common
converter (FR-CV), use the inverter with "6" (factory-set) in Pr.183. (Refer to
page 161.)
5. Do not insert NFB between terminals P-N(P (+) - P/L+, N (-) - N/L-)
6. Make sure terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1 are connected to the power
supply. Running the inverter without connecting the terminals will damage
the power regeneration common converter.
36
2.2.6 Design information
1) When performing commercial power supply-inverter switch-over operation, securely
provide electrical and mechanical interlocks for the MC1 and MC2 used for
commercial power supply-inverter switch-over.
When there is a commercial power supply-inverter switch-over circuit as shown
below, the inverter will be damaged by leakage current from the power supply due to
arcs generated at the time of switch-over or chattering caused by a sequence error.
2) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure,
provide a magnetic contactor in the inverter's primary circuit and also make up a
sequence which will not switch on the start signal.
If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will
automatically restart as soon as the power is restored.
3) Since the input signals to the control circuit are on a low level, use two or more
parallel micro signal contacts or a twin contact for contact inputs to prevent a contact
fault.
2
4) Do not apply a large voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. STF) of the control
circuit.
5) Always apply a voltage to the alarm output terminals (A, B, C) via a relay coil, lamp
etc.
6) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.
1) Commercial power supply-inverter 3) Low-level signal contacts

switch-over
MC1
Interlock
Power R (L1) U
supply IM
S (L2) V MC2
T (L3) W Leakage current
Low-level signal contacts Twin contact
Inverter
37
2.3 Other Wiring

2.3.1 Power supply harmonics
Power supply harmonics may be generated from the converter section of the inverter,
affecting the power supply equipment, power capacitor, etc. Power supply harmonics
are different in generation source, frequency band and transmission path from radio
frequency (RF) noise and leakage currents. Take the following counter measures.
z The differences between harmonics and RF noises are indicated below:

Item Harmonics RF Noise
Normally 40th to 50th degrees or High frequency (several 10kHz to
Frequency
less (up to 3kHz or less) 1GHz order)
Environment To wire paths, power impedance Across spaces, distance, laying paths
Quantitative Occurs randomly, quantitative
Logical computation is possible
understanding understanding is difficult.
Generated Approximately proportional to According to current fluctuation rate
amount load capacity (larger with faster switching)
Immunity of
Specified in standards for each Differs according to maker's device
affected
device. specifications.
device
Examples of
Install a reactor. Increase the distance.
safeguard
z Countermeasures
The harmonic current generated from the Power factor
inverter to the power supply differs according improving DC
to various conditions such as the wiring NFB reactor
Motor
Inverter
impedance, whether a power factor

IM
improving reactor is used or not, and output
frequency and output current on load side.
Power factor Do not insert power
For the output frequency and output current,
improving AC factor improving capacitor
the adequate method is to obtain them under reactor
rated load at the maximum operating
frequency.
Note: A power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter's
output side may overheat or be damaged due to the harmonics of the inverter
output. Also, when an overcurrent flows in the inverter, the overcurrent
protection is activated. Hence, when the motor is driven by the inverter, do not
install a capacitor or surge suppressor on the inverter's output side. To improve
the power factor, insert a power factor improving reactor in the inverter's input
or DC circuit. For details, refer to the FR-A500/E500 series technical
information.
38
2.3.2 Harmonic suppression guideline
Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point via a power
transformer. The harmonic suppression guideline was established to protect other
consumers from these outgoing harmonic currents.
1) "Harmonic suppression guideline for household appliances and general-purpose
products"
This guideline was issued by the Japanese Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry
(formerly Ministry of International Trade and Industry) in September, 1994 and
applies to 200V class inverters of 3.7kW or less*. By installing the FR-BEL or FR-BAL
power factor improving reactor, inverters comply with the "haramonic suppression
techniques for transistorized inverters (input current 20A or less)" established by the
Japan Electrical Manufacturers′ Association. Therefore install the optional reactor for
the 200V class, 3.7kW or less inverter.
* For the single-phase 200V class, the guideline applies to 2.2kW and less models.
For the single-phase 100V class, the guideline applies to 0.75kW and less models.
2) "Harmonic suppression guideline for specific consumers"
This guideline sets forth the maximum values of harmonic currents outgoing from a
high-voltage or specially high-voltage consumer who will install, add or renew
harmonic generating equipment. If any of the maximum values is exceeded, this
guideline requires that consumer to take certain suppression measures.
Table 1 Maximum Values of Outgoing Harmonic Currents per 1kW Contract Power
Received Power Over
Voltage
5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd
23rd 2
6.6kV 3.5 2.5 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.9 0.76 0.70
22kV 1.8 1.3 0.82 0.69 0.53 0.47 0.39 0.36
33kV 1.2 0.86 0.55 0.46 0.35 0.32 0.26 0.24
(1) Application of the harmonic suppression guideline for specific
consumers
New installation/addition/
renewal of equipment
Calculation of equivalent
capacity sum
Not more than

reference capacity Sum of equivalent
capacities
Over reference
capacity
Calculation of outgoing
harmonic current
Is outgoing harmonic Over m aximum value

current equal to or lower
than maximum value?
Harmonic suppression
technique is required.
Not more than
maximum value
Harmonic suppression
technique is not required.
39
Table 2 Conversion Factors for FR-E500 Series
Class Circuit Type Conversion Factor (Ki)
Without reactor K31 = 3.4
3-phase bridge With reactor (AC side) K32 = 1.8
3
(Capacitor-smoothed) With reactor (DC side) K33 = 1.8
With reactors (AC, DC sides) K34 = 1.4
Self-exciting 3-phase When high power factor
5 K5 = 0
bridge converter is used
Table 3 Equivalent Capacity Limits

Received Power Voltage Reference Capacity
6.6kV 50 kVA
22/33 kV 300 kVA
66kV or more 2000 kVA
Table 4 Harmonic Contents (Values at the fundamental current of 100%)

Reactor 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
Not used 65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8
Used (AC side) 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1.9 1.7 1.3
Used (DC side) 30 13 8.4 5.0 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2
Used (AC, DC sides) 28 9.1 7.2 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 1.4
1) Calculation of equivalent capacity (P0) of harmonic generating equipment
The "equivalent capacity" is the capacity of a 6-pulse converter converted from the
capacity of consumer's harmonic generating equipment and is calculated with the
following equation. If the sum of equivalent capacities is higher than the limit in Table
3, harmonics must be calculated with the following procedure:
P0=Σ (Ki× Pi) [kVA] * Rated capacity: Determined by the
Ki : Conversion factor (refer to Table 2) capacity of the applied motor and found
Pi : Rated capacity of harmonic in Table 5. It should be noted that the
generating equipment* [kVA] rated capacity used here is used to
i : Number indicating the conversion calculate a generated harmonic amount
circuit type and is different from the power supply
capacity required for actual inverter drive.
2) Calculation of outgoing harmonic current

Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converterd from received
power voltage) × operation ratio × harmonic content
• Operation ratio: Operation ratio = actual load factor × operation time ratio
during 30 minutes
• Harmonic content: Found in Table 4.
40
Table 5 Rated Capacities and Outgoing Harmonic Currents for Inverter Drive
Rated 6.6kV Fundamental Wave Current Converted from 6.6kV

Applied Current [A] Equivalent of Rated (No reactor, 100% operation ratio)
Motor Fundamental Capacity
(kW) 200V 400V Wave Current (kVA) 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
(mA)
1.61
0.4 0.81 49 0.57 31.85 20.09 4.165 3.773 2.107 1.519 1.274 0.882
(Note)
2.74
0.75 1.37 83 0.97 53.95 34.03 7.055 6.391 3.569 2.573 2.158 1.494
(Note)
5.50
1.5 2.75 167 1.95 108.6 68.47 14.20 12.86 7.181 5.177 4.342 3.006
(Note)
7.93
2.2 3.96 240 2.81 156.0 98.40 20.40 18.48 10.32 7.440 6.240 4.320
(Note)
13.0
3.7 6.50 394 4.61 257.1 161.5 33.49 30.34 16.94 12.21 10.24 7.092
(Note)
5.5 19.1 9.55 579 6.77 376.1 237.4 49.22 44.58 24.90 17.95 15.05 10.42
7.5 25.6 12.8 776 9.07 504.4 318.2 65.96 59.75 33.37 24.06 20.18 13.97
Note: When a motor of 3.7kW or less capacity is driven by a transistorized inverter of

more than 3.7kW. For example, when a 3.7kW or less motor is driven by a
5.5kW transistorized inverter, the transistorized inverter is not the target of the
household appliances/general-purpose products guideline, but because they 2
must be included in the calculation of the harmonic current of the guideline, the
fundamental wave input currents are indicated.
3) Harmonic suppression technique requirement
If the outgoing harmonic current is higher than; maximum value per 1kW (contract
power) × contract power, a harmonic suppression technique is required.
4) Harmonic suppression techniques
No. Item Description
Reactor installation Install a reactor (ACL) on the AC side of the inverter or a reactor
1 (ACL, DCL) (DCL) on its DC side or both to suppress outgoing harmonic
currents.
High power factor The converter circuit is switched on-off to convert an input
converter current waveform into a sine wave, suppressing harmonic
2
(FR-HC) currents substantially. The high power factor converter (FR-HC)
is used with the standard accessory.
Installation of power When used with a series reactor, the power factor improving
3 factor improving capacitor has an effect of absorbing harmonic currents.
capacitor
Transformer multi- Use two transformers with a phase angle difference of 30° as in
4 phase operation -∆, ∆-∆ combination to provide an effect corresponding to 12
pulses, reducing low-degree harmonic currents.
AC filter A capacitor and a reactor are used together to reduce
5 impedances at specific frequencies, producing a great effect of
absorbing harmonic currents.
Passive filter This filter detects the current of a circuit generating a harmonic
(Active filter) current and generates a harmonic current equivalent to a
6 difference between that current and a fundamental wave current
to suppress a harmonic current at a detection point, providing a
great effect of absorbing harmonic currents.
41
2.3.3 Inverter-generated noise and reduction techniques
Some noises enter the inverter causing it to incorrectly operate, and others are radiated
by the inverter causing misoperation of peripheral devices. Though the inverter is
designed to be insusceptible to noise, it handles low-level signals, so it requires the
following basic measures to be taken. Also, since the inverter chops the output at high
carrier frequencies, it could generate noise. If these noises cause peripheral devices to
misoperate, measures should be taken to suppress noise. The measures differ slightly
depending on noise propagation paths.
1) Basic measures
• Do not run the power cables (I/O cables) and signal cables of the inverter in parallel
with each other and do not bundle them.
• Use twisted shield cables for the detector connecting and control signal cables and
connect the sheathes of the shield cables to terminal SD.
• Earth (ground) the inverter, motor, etc. at one point.
2) Measures against noise which enters and causes misoperation of the inverter
When devices which generate noise (devices which use magnetic contactors,
magnetic brakes, many relays, for example) are installed near the inverter, the
inverter may misoperate due to noise. The following measures must be taken:
• Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate noise to suppress noise.
• Fit data line filters (refer to page 45) to signal cables.
• Earth (ground) the shields of the detector connection and control signal cables with
cable clamp metal.
42
3) Measures against noises which are radiated by the inverter causing misoperation of
peripheral devices.
Inverter-generated noises are largely classified into those radiated by the cables
connected to the inverter and inverter main circuit (I/O), those electromagnetically
and electrostatically inducted to the signal cables of the peripheral devices close to
the main circuit power supply, and those transmitted through the power supply
cables.
Inverter-generated Air-propagated Noise directly radiated by

noise ··· Path 1)
noise inverter
Noise radiated by power
··· Path 2)
cables
Noise radiated by motor
··· Path 3)
cables
Magnetic induc-
··· Path 4), 5)
tion noise
Static induction
··· Path 6)
noise
Cable propaga- Noise propagated through 2
··· Path 7)
ted noise power cables
Leakage noise from earth
··· Path 8)
(ground) cable due to
leakage current
5) Telephone
7) 7)
2)
1) Sensor
power supply
3) Inverter
Instrument Receiver
6) 1) 8)
4)
3) Sensor
Motor IM
43
Noise Path Measures

When devices which handle low-level signals and are susceptible to
misoperation due to noise (such as instruments, receivers and
sensors) are installed near the inverter and their signal cables are
contained in the same panel as the inverter or are run near the
inverter, the devices may be misoperated by air-propagated noise
and the following measures must be taken:
(1) Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the
inverter.
1), 2), 3)
(2) Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the
inverter.
(3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O
cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
(4) Insert line noise filters onto I/O and radio noise filters into inputs to
suppress cable-radiated noises.
(5) Use shielded cables for signal cables and power cables and run
them in individual metal conduits to further reduce effects.
When the signal cables are run in parallel with or bundled with the
power cables, magnetic and static induction noises may be
propagated to the signal cables causing misoperation of the devices
and the following measures must be taken:
(1) Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the
inverter.
4), 5), 6)
(2) Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the
inverter.
(3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O
cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
(4) Use shielded cables for signal cables and power cables and run
them in individual metal conduits to further reduce effects.
When the power supplies of the peripheral devices are connected to
the power supply of the inverter within the same line, inverter-
generated noise may flow back through the power supply cables
causing misoperation of the devices and the following measures
7) must be taken:
(1) Install the radio noise filter (FR-BIF) to the power cables (input
cables) of the inverter.
(2) Install the line noise filter (FR-BLF, FR-BSF01) to the power
cables (I/O cables) of the inverter.
When a closed loop circuit is formed by connecting the peripheral
device wiring to the inverter, leakage current may flow through the
8) earth (ground) cable of the inverter causing misoperation of the
device. In such a case, disconnection of the earth (ground) cable of
the device may cause the device to operate properly.
44
z Data line filter
Noise entry can be prevented by providing a data line filter for the detector or other
cable.
z Data examples
By decreasing the carrier frequency, the By using shielded cables as signal
noise terminal voltage* can be reduced. cables, induction noise can be reduced
Use Pr. 72 to set the carrier frequency to greatly (1/10 to 1/100). Induction noise
a low value (1kHz). can also be reduced by moving the
Though motor noise increases at a low signal cables away from the inverter
carrier frequency, selection of Soft-PWM output cables.
will make it unoffending. (Separation of 30cm reduces noise to 1/
2 to 1/3.)
By fitting the FR-BSF01 or BLF on the
inverter output side, induction noise to
the signal cables can be reduced.
Differences between noise terminal Noise induced to signal cables by
voltages at different carrier frequencies inverter output cables
Conditions Conditions
Induction voltage (dB)
Average terminal voltage 100 Inverter: FR-E520-3.7K

0dB=1µV Parallel cable Motor: FR-JR 4P 3.7kW
Noise terminal voltage (dB)
120dB=1V 80
120
Carrier frequency 10kHz
Output frequency: 30Hz
Twisted pair cable Noise form: Normal mode 2
100 60
5cm
80 40 Inverter d(cm) Motor
Coaxial cable
60 FR-BLF
20
40 FR-BSF01 Terminal
Carrier frequency 1kHz (4T)
20 0 10 20 30 40 50 Measuring instrument
0 Line-to-line distance d (cm)
0.1 1 10
Noise frequency (MHz)
* Noise terminal voltage:Represents the magnitude of noise propagated from the

inverter to the power supply.
z Example of counter measures against noise
FR-BLF
FR-BLF Control box Reduce carrier frequency. Install filter to
Install filter FR-BSF01
FR-BSF01 inverter output side.
to inverter input side. Motor
Inverter FR- FR-
Inverter BSF01 IM
power supply BSF01
Install filter FR-BIF to

FR- Use 4-core cable for motor power
inverter input side. BIF cable and use one wire as
Separate inverter and power line earth (ground) cable.
by more than 30cm and at least Use twisted pair shielded cable.
10cm from sensor circuit. Sensor
Control power Power supply
supply for sensor
Do not earth (ground) control
Do not earth (ground) shield but connect it to
box directly.
signal common cable.
Do not earth (ground) control cable.
45
2.3.4 Leakage currents and countermeasures
Due to the static capacitance existing in the inverter I/O wiring and motor, leakage
currents flow through them. Since their values depend on the static capacitance, carrier
frequency, etc., take the following measures.
(1) To-earth (ground) leakage currents

Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter's own line but also into the other
lines through the earth (ground) cable, etc. These leakage currents may operate earth
(ground) leakage circuit breakers and earth (ground) leakage relays unnecessarily.
z Countermeasures
• If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the carrier frequency (Pr. 72) of the
inverter.
Note that motor noise increases. Selection of Soft-PWM (Pr. 240) will make it
unoffending.
• By using earth (ground) leakage circuit breakers designed for harmonic and surge
suppression in the inverter's own line and other line, operation can be performed
with the carrier frequency kept high (with low noise).
z To-earth (ground) leakage current

• Note that a long wiring length will increase leakage currents. Decrease the carrier
frequency of the inverter to reduce leakage currents.
• Higher motor capacity leads to larger leakage currents. The leakage currents of the
400V class are higher than those of the 200V class.
(2) Line-to-line leakage currents

Harmonics of leakage currents flowing in static capacities between the inverter output
cables may operate the external thermal relay unnecessarily.
NFB Thermal relay Motor

Power Inverter IM
supply
Line static capacitances
Line-to-line leakage current path
46
z Countermeasures
• Use the electronic thermal relay function of the inverter.
• Decrease the carrier frequency. Note that motor noise increases. Selection of Soft-
PWM will make it unoffending.
To ensure that the motor is protected not to be influenced by line-to-line leakage
currents, we recommend the protection method which uses a temperature sensor
to directly detect motor temperature.
2.3.5 Inverter-driven 400V class motor

In the PWM type inverter, a surge voltage attributable to wiring constants is generated at
the motor terminals.
Especially for a 400V class motor, the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation.
When the 400V class motor is driven by the inverter, consider the following measures:
z Measures
It is recommended to take either of the following measures:
(1) Rectifying the motor insulation
For the 400V class motor, use an insulation-enhanced motor. Specifically,
2
1) Specify the "400V class inverter-driven, insulation-enhanced motor".
2) For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor,
use the "inverter-driven, dedicated motor".
Note: If the wiring length between the motor and inverter is 40m or longer, set Pr. 240
to long wiring mode in addition to the above countermeasures to operate the
inverter. (Refer to page 118 for Pr. 240 "Soft-PWM selection".)
(2) Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side

On the secondary side of the inverter, connect the optional surge voltage suppression
filter (FR-ASF-H).
47
2.3.6 Peripheral devices
(1) Selection of peripheral devices
Check the capacity of the motor to be used with the inverter you purchased.
Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according to the capacity.
Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices:
No-Fuse Breaker (NFB) or Earth Magnetic
(Ground) Leakage Circuit
Power Contactor (MC)
Motor Breaker (NV) (Note 6)
Supply
Inverter Type Output With power
Capacity
(kW) factor
(kVA) Standard A B C
improving
reactor
FR-E520-0.1K 0.1 0.4 30AF 5A 30AF 5A S-N11 S-N18 S-N20
Three-phase 200V

FR-E520-2.2K 2.2 5.5 30AF 20A 30AF 15A S-N10
FR-E520-3.7K 3.7 9 30AF 30A 30AF 30A S-N20, S-N21
FR-E520-5.5K 5.5 12 50AF 50A 50AF 40A S-N25
FR-E520-7.5K 7.5 17 100AF 60A 50AF 50A S-N35
FR-E540-0.4K 0.4 1.5 30AF 5A 30AF 5A S-N10
Three-phase 400V
FR-E540-0.75K 0.75 2.5 30AF 5A 30AF 5A S-N10

FR-E540-1.5K 1.5 4.5 30AF 10A 30AF 10A S-N10
FR-E540-2.2K 2.2 5.5 30AF 15A 30AF 10A S-N10
FR-E540-3.7K 3.7 9 30AF 20A 30AF 15A S-N20, S-N21
FR-E540-5.5K 5.5 12 30AF 30A 30AF 20A S-N20, S-N21
FR-E540-7.5K 7.5 17 30AF 30A 30AF 30A S-N20, S-N21
Single-phase 100V Single-phase 200V
FR-E520S-0.1K 0.1 0.4 30AF 5A 30AF 5A S-N18 S-N20 S-N20
FR-E510W-0.1K 0.1 0.5 30AF 10A 30AF 10A S-N18 S-N21 S-N21
48
Note: 1. • Select the NFB according to the
Power supply capacity(kVA)

Power factor
inverter power supply capacity. improving
• Install one NFB per inverter. AC reactor
range
500 B A
NFB INV IM
C
NFB INV IM 50
2. The power supply cable size of the 0 10 20 Wiring length(m)
motor indicated assumes that its Note: Power supply used has the above
length is 20m. recommended size.
3. The inverter input side magnetic contactor to be chosen differs between the
applicable ranges A, B and C shown on the right, depending on the power
supply capacity and wiring length. For the FR-E520-0.4K to 1.5K, FR-E520S-
0.4K to 0.75K and FR-E510W-0.4K to 0.75K, choose the S-N10 when the
power factor improving reactor (FR-BEL or FR-BAL) is used.
4. When the inverter capacity is greater than the motor capacity, choose the
breaker and magnetic contactor in accordance with the inverter type and
choose the cables and power factor improving reactor in accordance with the
motor output.
5. When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault
(short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc. Identify the cause of 2
the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
6. For installations in the United States or Canada, the circuit breaker must be
inverse time or instantaneous trip type.
z Installation and selection of no-fuse breaker

Install a no-fuse breaker (NFB) in the power supply side for protection of the inverter's
primary wiring. Refer to the previous table and choose the NFB according to the
inverter's power supply side power factor (which changes with the power supply
voltage, output frequency and load). Especially for a completely electromagnetic type
NFB, the one with a larger capacity must be selected since its operational
characteristics change with harmonic currents. (Check the data of the corresponding
breaker for confirmation.) Also the earth (ground) leakage circuit breaker used should
be our product durable against harmonics/surges.
49
z Power factor improving reactor
Power Factor Power Factor

Inverter Model
Improving AC Reactor Improving DC Reactor
FR-E520-0.1K FR-BAL-0.4K (Note 1) FR-BEL-0.4K (Note 1)
FR-E520-0.2K FR-BAL-0.4K (Note 1) FR-BEL-0.4K (Note 1)
Three-phase 200V
FR-E520-0.4K FR-BAL-0.4K FR-BEL-0.4K

FR-E540-0.4K FR-BAL-H0.4K FR-BEL-H0.4K
Three-phase 400V

FR-E520S-0.1K FR-BAL-0.4K (Note 1) FR-BEL-0.4K (Note 1)
phase 200V
Single-

FR-E510W-0.1K FR-BAL-0.75K (Note 1)  (Note 2)
phase 100V
 (Note 2)
Single-
FR-E510W-0.2K FR-BAL-1.5K (Note 1)

Note: 1. The power factor may be slightly lower.
2. The single-phase 100V power input models does not allow the power factor
improving DC reactor to be fitted.
50
When the inverter is connected near a large- NFB FR-BAL Inverter
capacity power supply transformer (500kVA or more,
R X
wiring length 10m maximum) or there is power R (L1) U
Power S Y
capacitor switch-over, excessive peak currents may supply S (L2) V
T Z T (L3) W
flow into the power input circuit and damage the P(+)P1
converter circuit. In such a case, the power supply
improving reactor (FR-BEL or FR-BAL) must be
FR-BEL
installed.
When the FR-E510W-0.4K is connected to a single-
Power
phase 100V class output power transformer (in Power 1500 factor
improving
excess of 50kVA capacity), install the power factor supply 1000 reactor
capacity range
improving reactor (FR-BAL-2.2K) to improve (kVA) 500
reliability
0 10 Wiring length(m)
(2) Selecting the rated sensitivity current for the earth (ground) leakage
circuit breaker
When using the earth (ground) leakage circuit breaker with the inverter circuit, select its
rated sensitivity current as follows, independently of the PWM carrier frequency:
2
Example of leakage current per 1km in Leakage current example of 3-phase
cable path during commercial power induction motor during commercial
supply operation when the CV cable is power supply operation (200V 60Hz)
routed in metal conduit
(200V 60Hz)
Leakage current (mA)
Leakage current (mA)
120 2.0
100 1.0
80 0.7
60 0.5
40 0.3
0.2
20
0 0.1
2 3.5 8 14 22 38 80 150 1.5 3.7 7.5 15 22 37 55
5.5 30 60 100 2.2 5.5 11 18.5 30 45
Cable size (mm2) Motor capacity (kW)
• Breaker for harmonic and surge

Rated sensitivity current: I∆n ≥ 10×(lg1+Ign+lg2+lgm)
• Standard breaker
Rated sensitivity current: I∆n ≥ 10×{lg1+lgn+3×(lg2+lgm)}
lg1, lg2 : Leakage currents of cable path during commercial power supply operation
lgn* : Leakage current of noise filter on inverter input side
lgm : Leakage current of motor during commercial power supply operation
* Note the leakage current value of the noise filter installed on the inverter input
side.
51
<Example>
5.5mm2 × 5m 5.5mm2 × 70m

NV Noise filter
Inverter IM 3φ
200V 2.2kW
Ig1 Ign Ig2 Igm
Note: 1. The earth (ground) leakage circuit breaker should be installed to the primary
(power supply) side of the inverter.
2. Earth (ground) fault on the secondary side of the inverter can be detected at
the running frequency of 120Hz or lower.
3. In the connection neutral point earthed (grounded) system, the sensitivity
current becomes worse for earth (ground) faults on the inverter secondary
side. Earthing (grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and
local safety regulations and electrical codes. (JIS, NEC section 250, IEC 536
class 1 and other applicable standards)
4. When the breaker is installed on the secondary side of the inverter, it may be
unnecessarily operated by harmonics if the effective value is less than the
rating. In this case, do not install the breaker since the eddy current, hysteresis
loss, and the temperature all increase.
5. General products indicate the following models.
BV-C1, BC-V, NVB, NV-L, NV-G2N, NV-G3NA, NV-2F, earth (ground) leakage
relay (except NV-ZHA), NV with AA neutral wire open-phase protection
The other models are designed for harmonic and surge suppression
NV-C/NV-S/MN series, NV30-FA, NV50-FA, BV-C2, earth (ground) leakage
alarm breaker (NF-Z), NV-ZHA, NV-H
Breaker for Harmonic
Standard Breaker
and Surge
Leakage current (Ig1) 5m
33 × = 0.17
(mA) 1000m
Leakage current (Ign)
0 (without noise filter)
(mA)
Leakage current (Ig2) 70m
33 × = 2.31
(mA) 1000m
Motor leakage
0.18
current (Igm) (mA)
Total leakage current (mA) 2.66 7.64
Rated sensitivity current
30 100
(mA) ( ≥ Ig × 10)
52
2.3.7 Power off and magnetic contactor (MC)
(1) Inverter primary side magnetic contactor (MC)
On the inverter primary side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following
purposes. (Refer to page 48 for selection.)
1) To release the inverter from the power supply when the inverter protective function
is activated or the drive becomes faulty (e.g. emergency stop operation)
When cycle operation or heavy-duty operation is performed with an optional brake
resistor connected, overheat and burnout of the electrical-discharge resistor can
be prevented if a regenerative brake transistor is damaged due to insufficient heat
capacity of the electrical-discharge resistor and excess regenerative brake duty.
2) To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an
inverter stop made by a power failure
3) To rest the inverter for an extended period of time
The control power supply for inverter is always running and consumes a little
power. When stopping the inverter for a long time, switching inverter power off
saves power slightly.
4) To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and
inspection work
As the inverter's primary MC is used for the above purposes, select the one of
class JEM1038-AC3 for the inverter input side current when making an emergency
stop during normal operation. 2
REMARKS
The MC may be switched on/off to start/stop the inverter. However, since repeated
inrush currents at power-on will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is
about 100,000 times), frequent starts and stops must be avoided.
Turn on/off the inverter start controlling terminals (STF, STR) to run/stop the inverter.
z Inverter Start/Stop Circuit NFB MC
Example R U
As shown on the right, always Power
V
To
supply S motor
use the start signal (ON or OFF
T W
across terminals STF or STR-
SD) to make a start or stop. T (*1)
(Refer to page 18.) Inverter
Operation ready
A
REMARKS OFF ON
*1 When the power supply is MC B
MC C
400V class, install a step-
RA
down transformer. Start/Stop STF(STR)
SD
MC Operation
RA
OFF RA
(2) Handling of secondary side magnetic contactor

Note that if it is switched off then on again during operation when the magnetic
contactor is installed between the inverter and motor, a large inrush current may flow,
affecting the motor.
53
2.3.8 Instructions for UL, cUL
(Standard to comply with: UL 508C, CSA C22.2 No. 14)
(1) Installation
The above types of inverter have been approved as products for use
in enclosure and approval tests were conducted under the following
conditions. For enclosure design, refer to these conditions so that the ambient
temperature of the inverter is 50°C or less.
z 200V class, 100V class
Cabinet (enclosure)
Inverter Type Vent Hole Area Cooling Fan
Size (Unit: mm)
• 55% of both the side of the Installed at the enclosure top
Cabinet to suck air from inside the
W H D
FR-E520 -3.7K 255×192×218 • Width of each slit: 3.2mm enclosure to the outside.
• To be provided on each of (Fan air flow: 2 × 0.59m3/min
the upper side areas. or more)
z 400V class
Design the enclosure so that the ambient temperature, humidity and ambience of the
inverter will satisfy the above specifications. (Refer to page 219.)
Branch circuit protection
For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection must be provided, in
accordance with the National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes.
For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance
with the Canada Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes.
(2) Wiring of the power supply and motor
Screw the cables wired to the input (R, S, T) <L1, L2, L3> and output (U, V, W) terminals
and control circuit of the inverter to the specified tightening torque using UL-recognized,
75°C or higher rated copper wires and round crimping terminals. Crimp the crimping
terminals with the crimping tool recommended by the terminal maker.
(3) Short circuit ratings
Suitable For Use In A Circuit Capable of Delivering Not More Than 5kA rms
Symmetrical Amperes.
(4) Motor overload protection
When using the electronic thermal relay function as motor overload protection, set the
rated motor current in Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay".
When connecting two or more motors to the inverter, install external thermal relays for
individual motors
.
Reference: Motor overload protection characteristics

50% setting 100% setting
(Note 1, 2) (Note 2)
Protection activating range
Range on the right of characteristic curve
30Hz or higher Normal operating range
Operation time (s)
240 (Note 3)
20Hz Range on the left of characteristic curve
10Hz (Note 1) When you set the 50% value (current
180
value) of the rated inverter output current.
120
Electronic overcurrent (Note 2) The % value denotes the percentage of
protection for transistor the current value to the rated inverter
protection
60 output current, not to the rated motor current.
(Note 3) This characteristic curve will be described
even under operation of 6Hz or higher
0 50 100 150 180200 when you set the electronic overcurrent
Inverter output current (%) protection dedicated to the Mitsubishi
(% to rated inverter output current) constant-torque motor.
54
2.3.9 Instructions for compliance with the European Directive
(The products conforming to the Low Voltage Directive carry the CE mark.)
(1) EMC Directive
1)Our view of transistorized inverters for the EMC Directive
A transistorized inverter is a component designed for installation in a control box
and for use with the other equipment to control the equipment/device.
Therefore, we understand that the EMC Directive does not apply directly to
transistorized inverters. For this reason, we do not place the CE mark on the
transistorized inverters. (The CE mark is placed on inverters in accordance with
the Low Voltage Directive.) The European power drive manufacturers' organization
(CEMEP) also holds this point of view.
2)Compliance
We understand that the transistorized inverters are not covered directly by the
EMC Directive. However, the EMC Directive applies to machines/equipment into
which transistorized inverters have been incorporated, and these machines and
equipment must carry the CE marks. Hence, we prepared the technical information
"EMC Installation Guidelines" (information number BCN-A21041-202) so that
machines and equipment incorporating transistorized inverters may conform to the 2
EMC Directive more easily.
3)Outline of installation method

Install an inverter using the following methods:
* Use the inverter with an European Standard-compliant noise filter.
* For wiring between the inverter and motor, use shielded cables or run them in a
metal piping and earth (ground) the cables on the inverter and motor sides with
the shortest possible distance.
* Insert a line noise filter and ferrite core into the power and control lines as
required.
Full information including the European Standard-compliant noise filter
specifications are written in the technical information "EMC Installation
Guidelines" (BCN-A21041-202). Please contact your sales representative.
55
(2) Low Voltage Directive

1)Our view of transistorized inverters for the Low Voltage Directive
Transistorized inverters are covered by the Low Voltage Directive (Standard to
comply with: DIN VDE0160 (200V class), EN50178 (400V class, 100V class)).
2)Compliance
We have self-confirmed our inverters as products compliant to the Low Voltage
Directive and place the CE mark on the inverters.
3) Outline of instructions
* In the 400V class inverters, the rated input voltage range is three-phase, 380V to
415V, 50Hz/60Hz.
* Connect the equipment to the earth (ground) securely. Do not use an earth
(ground) leakage circuit breaker as an electric shock protector without
connecting the equipment to the earth (ground).
* Wire the earth (ground) terminal independently. (Do not connect two or more
cables to one terminal.)
* The wire size on pages 21 and 23 are shown for following conditions
• Ambient Temp: 40°C maximum
• Wire installation: On wall without ducts or conduits
If conditions are different from above, select appropriate wire according to
EN60204 ANNEX C TABLE 5.
* Use the no-fuse breaker and magnetic contactor which conform to the EN or IEC
Standard.
Design notice: Where residual-current-operated protective device (RCD) is used
for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only RCD of
Type B is allowed on the supply side of this Electronic Equipment
(EE). Otherwise another protective measure shall be applied
such as separation of the EE from the environment by double or
reinforced insulation or isolation of EE and supply system by a
transformer. (Extract from EN51078)
* Use the inverter under the conditions of overvoltage category II and
contamination level 2 or higher specified in IEC664.
(a) To use the inverter under the conditions of overvoltage category II, put an
insulated transformer or surge absorber which conform to the EN or IEC
standard on the inverter input side.
(b) To meet the contamination level 2, install the inverter in a control box
protected against ingress of water, oil, carbon, dust, etc. (IP54 or higher).
* On the input and output of the inverter, use cables of the type and size set forth
in EN60204 Appendix C.
* The operating capacity of the relay outputs (terminal symbols A, B, C) should be
30VDC, 0.3A.
* The terminals indicated as the input and output terminals for control circuit on
page 16 are isolated safely from the main circuit.
Environment
During During
In storage
operation transportation
Ambient Temperature -10°C to +50°C -20°C to +65°C -20°C to +65°C
Ambient Humidity 90% RH or less 90% RH or less 90% RH or less
Maximum Altitude 1,000 m 1,000 m 10,000 m
Details are given in the technical information "Low Voltage Directive Conformance
Guide" (BCN-A21041-203). Please contact your sales representative.
56
CHAPTER 3
OPERATION/CONTROL
This chapter provides the basic "operation/control" for use of this

product.
Always read this chapter before using the equipment.
Chapter 1
3.1 Pre-Operation Information ....................... 58

3.2 About the Operation Panel ...................... 61 Chapter 2
3.3 Operation ................................................. 68
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
57
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.1 Pre-Operation Information

3.1.1 Types of operation modes
The inverter can be operated in any of "PU operation mode", "external operation mode",
"combined operation mode" and "communication operation mode". Prepare required
instruments and parts according to the operation mode. For the way of changing the
operation mode, refer to page 64.
(1) PU operation mode

(factory setting, Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = 1)
The inverter is operated from the operation panel or parameter
unit.
Use Pr. 146 "frequency setting command selection" to choose
the way to make frequency setting from the operation panel.
For the Pr. 146 setting method, refer to page 65.
Pr. 146 = 0: Frequency setting using the built-in frequency
setting potentiometer (factory setting)
Pr. 146 = 1: Digital frequency setting using / key
Preparation
• Operation unit...................Operation panel (equipped as standard) or parameter unit
(FR-PU04)
• Connection cable..............To be prepared for use of the operation panel away from
the inverter or for use of the parameter unit (FR-PU04).
FR-CB2 (option)
• FR-E5P (option) ...............To be prepared for use of the operation panel away from
the inverter. It is available as a set of operation panel cover
and connection cable junction adaptor.
(2) External operation mode (Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = 2)
The inverter is operated using an external start signal and an
external frequency setting signal.
Preparation
• Start signal ....................... Switch, relay, etc.
• Frequency setting signal .. 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA DC
signals or multiple speeds from a
potentiometer or outside the
inverter
Note: Operation cannot be started by the start signal alone. Both the start signal and
frequency setting signal are required to run the inverter.
58
OPERATION/CONTROL
(3) Combined operation mode 1 (Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = 3)
The start signal is an external signal.
The frequency setting signal is set using the operation panel or
parameter unit.
Use Pr. 146 "frequency setting command selection" to choose
the way to make frequency setting from the operation panel. For
the Pr. 146 setting method, refer to page 66.
Pr. 146 = 0: Frequency setting using the built-in frequency
setting potentiometer (factory setting)
Pr. 146 = 1: Digital frequency setting using / key
Preparation
• Start signal ....................... Switch, relay, etc.
• Operation unit .................. Operation panel (equipped as
standard) or parameter unit (FR-
PU04)
• Connection cable ............. Refer to (1) PU operation mode.
• FR-E5P (option) ............... Refer to (1) PU operation mode.
(4) Combined operation mode 2 (Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = 4)

The start signal is entered from the operation command key
of the operation panel. 3
The frequency setting signal is set using the external
frequency setting signal.
Preparation
• Frequency setting signal .. 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA
DC signals from an external
potentiometer or from outside
the inverter
• Operation unit .................. Operation panel (equipped as
standard) or parameter unit
(FR-PU04)
• Connection cable ............. Refer to (1) PU operation mode.
• FR-E5P (option) ............... Refer to (1) PU operation mode.
59
OPERATION/CONTROL
(5) Communication operation mode
(Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = 0 or 1)
Communication operation can be performed by connecting a personal computer and
the PU connector with the RS-485 communication cable. The inverter setup software
(FR-SW-SETUP-WE (or -WJ for Japanese Version)) is available as an FR-E500
inverter start-up support software package.
Preparation
• Connection cable......................Connector: RJ45 connector
Cable: Cable conforming to EIA568
(e.g. 10BASE-T cable)
• Personal computer ...................Refer to the instruction manual of the inverter setup
software for hardware requirements of the inverter
setup software.
• RS-485, RS-232C converter ....To be prepared when the communication port of the
personal computer has RS-232C specifications.
3.1.2 Power on
Before switching power on, check the following.
z Installation check
Make sure that the inverter is installed correctly in a proper location. (Refer to page
14.)
z Wiring check
Make sure that the main and control circuits are wired correctly.
Make sure that the options and peripheral devices are selected and connected
correctly. (Refer to page 16.)
z Switch power on.

Power-on is complete if the operation panel LED shows correct data or the POWER
lamp (lit only when the operation panel is removed) is lit and the ALARM lamp is off.
60
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.2 About the Operation Panel

With the operation panel, you can run the inverter, set the frequency, monitor the
operation command display, set parameters, and display an error.
3.2.1 Names and functions of the operation panel
Cover opened
Unit indication
Hz RUN Display Hz RUN
Operation status
A MON A MON
PU EXT
LED 4 digits PU EXT indication
Setting key Reverse key
Mode key MODE SET REV
STOP STOP
RUN FWD
RESET MAX
RESET
MIN MAX MIN

Forward key
Built-in frequency
RUN key STOP/RESET key STOP/RESET key UP/DOWN key setting potentiometer
z Key indication
Key Description
RUN key Used to give a start rotation command.
Built-in frequency setting
You can set a frequency on an analog basis.
potentiometer
MODE key You can select the operation mode or setting mode.
SET key You can determine the frequency and parameter setting. 3
• Used to increase or decrease the running frequency
consecutively. Hold down this key to change the frequency.
/ key • Press this key in the setting mode to change the parameter
setting consecutively.
FWD
key Used to give a forward rotation command.
REV key Used to give a reverse rotation command.
• Used to stop operation.
STOP
RESET key • Used to reset the inverter when its output is stopped by the
activated protective function.
z Unit indications, operating status indications

Indication Description
Lit to indicate frequency.
Hz (Flickers or lit when Pr.52 "operation panel/PU main display data selection"
= "100". Refer to page 105.)
A Lit to indicate the current.
Lit while the inverter is operating. Lit to indicate forward rotation, and flickers
RUN
to indicate reverse rotation.
MON Lit in the monitor display mode.
PU Lit in the PU operation mode.
EXT Lit in the external operation mode.
61
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.2.2 Monitor display is changed by pressing the MODE

M
O
[D
E
] key
zMonitoring mode zFrequency setting zParameter setting

mode (Note) mode
Hz Hz
MON MODE MODE
PU PU PU EXT
MODE SET REV MODE SET REV MODE SET REV
FWD STOP FWD STOP FWD STOP

RESET MAX RESET MAX RESET MAX
MIN MIN MIN
MODE
zHelp mode zOperation mode
MODE MODE
PU PU
MODE SET REV MODE SET REV
STOP STOP
FWD MAX FWD MAX
RESET RESET
MIN MIN
(Note)The frequency setting mode is displayed only in the PU operation mode.
3.2.3 Monitoring
• Operation command indications given while a monitor display is being provided EXT
is lit to indicate external operation.
PU is lit to indicate PU operation.
Both EXT and PU are lit to indicate combined operation.
• The monitor display can also be changed during operation.
zFrequency monitor
zCurrent monitor zVoltage monitor zAlarm monitor
Hz
Alarm present
MON
PU EXT SET SET SET
A MON MON
MODE SET REV PU EXT PU EXT
STOP SET SET

FWD RESET MAX
MIN *1 *1
Alarm absent
SET
SET SET
*1
MODE *2
To 3.2.4 Frequency setting mode (Note3)
Note: 1. Hold down the SET key marked *1 for more than 1.5 s to change the current
monitor to the power-on monitor.
2. Hold down the SET key marked *2 for more than 1.5 s to display the last four
errors including the most recent one.
3. In the external operation mode, it shifts to the parameter setting mode.
62
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.2.4 Frequency setting
When the built-in frequency setting potentiometer is invalid (Pr. 146 = 1) in the PU
operation mode, set the frequency value used for operation performed under the
operation command given by the RUN key ( FWD or REV key).
This mode is displayed only in PU operation.
• When the / key is used to make the frequency setting
Set "1" (built-in frequency setting potentiometer invalid) in Pr. 146 "frequency setting
command selection". (For the setting method, refer to page 65.)
Change the set frequency with the / key.
To frequency monitoring
zFrequency setting mode zSet frequency MODE

zSet frequency changing write
Hz SET Hz
Hz
PU PU
PU
MODE SET REV Change the set Flicker

FWD
STOP
RESET MAX
frequency with
Hz
MIN
PU
MODE
To 3.2.5 Parameter setting mode 3
3.2.5 Parameter setting method

With the exception of some parameters, parameter setting can be made when the PU
operation mode is selected by the Pr. 79 setting.
(Also, as other to set method independently of the operation mode, you can set "2" in
Pr. 77. Refer to page 123.)
• A parameter value may either be set by updating its parameter number or setting the
value digit-by-digit using the / key.
• To write the setting, change it and press the SET key for about 1.5 s.
Note: If parameter write cannot be performed, refer to page 198.
63
OPERATION/CONTROL
(1) Example:To change the Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" setting
from "2" (external operation mode) to "1" (PU operation mode)
(For details of Pr. 79, refer to page 124.)
Press the MODE key, to choose the
parameter setting mode.
Parameter setting mode
Most significant Least significant

digit flickers Middle digit flickers digit flickers
PU
SET SET
MODE SET REV
STOP
FWD MAX
RESET
MIN
× 7 times × 9 times
or or
MODE
× 3 times × 1 time
To 3.2.6 Operation mode
SET
0 to 9 0 to 9
Current setting Setting change
SET
Press for
1.5s
SET
Setting write
When appears
1) If the RUN indication is lit or flickering, RUN
STOP
stop operation by pressing the RESET
key or turning off the forward rotation

(STF) or reverse rotation (STR) signal
Flicker connected to the control terminal.
2) You cannot set any value that is outside the
parameter setting range. Write a value within
the setting range.
"1" (PU operation mode) has been set in Pr. 79.
If the value and do not flicker but
appears, you did not press the SET key
for 1.5s when writing the value.
Press the key once, press the SET key, and
restart the setting from the beginning.
64
OPERATION/CONTROL
(2) When changing the Pr. 146 "frequency setting command selection"
setting from "0" (built-in frequency setting potentiometer valid) to "1"
(built-in frequency setting potentiometer invalid)
Press the MODE key, to choose the
parameter setting mode.

digit flickers Middle digit flickers digit flickers
PU
SET
MODE SET REV
STOP
FWD MAX
RESET
MIN
× 1 time × 4 times × 6 times
MODE SET SET
3.2.6 Operation mode
0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9
Current setting
SET
Setting change
3
SET Press for 1.5s
Setting write
When has appeared

1) If the EXT indication is lit, refer to page 64 and change
the Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" setting to "1"
EXT
(PU operation mode).
2) If the RUN indication is lit or flickers, press the
STOP
Flicker RESET key or turn off the forward rotation (STF) or RUN
reverse rotation (STR) signal connected to the control

terminal to stop operation.
3) You cannot set any value outside the parameter setting range.
Write a value within the setting range.
"1" (built-in frequency setting potentiometer invalid) has been set in

Pr. 146. If the display does not alternate between the set value and
parameter No. but has appeared, you did not
press the SET key for 1.5s to write the set value.
Press the key once, press the SET key, and restart the setting
from the beginning.
65
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.2.6 Operation mode
The operation mode change method which is shown below is only allowed when Pr. 79
"operation mode selection" is "0".
zPU operation
zPU jog operation zExternal operation

PU
PU EXT
MODE SET REV
STOP MODE
FWD
RESET MAX MODE
MIN
MODE
To 3.2.7 Help mode
Note: If the operation mode cannot be changed, refer to page 198.
3.2.7 Help mode
zAlarm history zAlarm history clear zParameter clear
PU EXT
MODE SET REV
FWD
STOP
RESET MAX zSoftware version zAll clear
MIN read
MODE
To 3.2.3 Monitoring mode
66
OPERATION/CONTROL
(1) Alarm history

Four past alarms can be displayed with the / key.
("." is appended to the most recent alarm.)
When no alarm exists, E._ _0 is displayed.
Most recent alarm
SET
SET
When alarm occurs

Hz
Frequency Current A
PU EXT PU EXT
Cumulative
energization time PU EXT
Voltage PU EXT
(2) Alarm history clear

Clears all alarm history.
Flicker
SET SET
SET Cancel
3
(3) Parameter clear
Initializes the parameter values to the factory settings. The calibration values are
not initialized.
(Parameter values are not cleared by setting "1" in Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection")
Flicker
SET SET
SET Cancel
Note: The Pr. 75, Pr. 146, Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 900 to Pr. 905, Pr.
922 and Pr. 923 values are not initialized.
(4) All clear
Initializes the parameter values and calibration values to the factory settings.
Flicker
SET SET
SET Cancel
Note: The Pr. 75 and Pr. 146 values are not initialized.
67
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.3 Operation
3.3.1 Pre-operation checks
Before starting operation, check the following:
z Safety
Perform test operation after making sure that safety is ensured if the machine should
become out of control.
z Machine
Make sure that the machine is free of damage.
z Parameters
Set the parameter values to match the operating machine (system) environment.
z Test operation
Perform test operation and make sure that the machine operates safely under light
load at a low frequency. After that, start operation.
Since the Pr. 240 "Soft-PWM setting" value is factory-set to select Soft-PWM control,
the tone is different from that in the conventional non-low acoustic noise mode, this is
not a fault.
68
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.3.2 PU operation mode (Operation using the operation panel)
(1) Using the built-in frequency setting potentiometer for operation at
60Hz (Factory setting)
Operation command: RUN key or FWD / REV key
Frequency setting: built-in frequency setting potentiometer
Related parameters:Pr. 79 "operation mode selection", Pr. 146 "frequency setting
command selection"
Step Description Image
Power on → Operation mode check
In the factory setting, switching power on chooses the PU ON
operation mode and lights up the [PU] indication.
1 If the [PU] indication is not lit, refer to page 64 and set "1" in Pr.
79. PU
Frequency setting potentiometer selection

Refer to page 65 and set "0" (built-in frequency setting
potentiometer) in Pr. 146 "frequency setting command
2 Flicker
selection".
(Refer to page 156)
Start
RUN
Press the RUN key (or FWD or REV key) of the operation panel.
3 The [RUN] indication is lit to indicate forward rotation, or FWD REV
Hz RUN
flickers to indicate reverse rotation. MON
PU
Acceleration → Constant speed 3

Slowly turn the potentiometer fully clockwise.
The frequency shown on the display increases gradually to
4
60.00Hz.
Deceleration
Slowly turn the potentiometer fully counterclockwise.
The frequency shown on the display decreases gradually to
5
0.00Hz.
The motor stops running.
Stop
STOP
Press the RESET key.
6 The [RUN] indication goes off. Hz
MON
PU EXT
<Reference> The running frequency available by turning the potentiometer fully

counterclockwise or fully clockwise can be changed using Pr. 922 "built-
in frequency setting potentiometer bias" or Pr. 923 "built-in frequency
setting potentiometer gain". (Refer to page 172.)
69
OPERATION/CONTROL
(2) Using the digital frequency setting for operation at 60Hz

By repeating step 2 below during motor run, speed can be varied.
Operation command: RUN key or FWD / REV key
Frequency setting: / key
Related parameters:Pr. 79 "operation mode selection", Pr. 146 "frequency setting
command selection"
In the factory setting, switching power on chooses the PU ON
operation mode and shows [PU].
1 If the [PU] indication is not lit, refer to page 64 and set "1" in Pr.
79.
PU
Running frequency setting

Set the running frequency to 60Hz.
1) Refer to page 65 and set "1" (built-in frequency setting (or)
potentiometer invalid) in Pr. 146 "frequency setting Hz RUN
command selection".
A MON
P U E XT
2 MODE SET R EV
2) Refer to page 69 and choose the frequency setting mode F WD STOP

RE SET MAX
MIN
using the MODE key.

3) Refer to page 63, change the setting using the / key,
and press the SET key to write the setting.
Start
Press the RUN key (or FWD / REV key). The monitoring mode is RUN
automatically selected and the output frequency is displayed.

3 FWD REV
The [RUN] indication is lit to indicate forward rotation, or Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
flickers to indicate reverse rotation. MODE
FWD
SET REV
STOP
RESET MAX
MIN
Stop
STOP
The motor is decelerated to a stop.
4 The [RUN] indication goes off.
Hz
MON
PU
(3) PU jog operation

Hold down the RUN (or FWD or REV ) key to perform operation, and release it to stop.
1) Set Pr. 15 "jog frequency" and Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration time".
2) Select the PU jog operation mode. (Refer to page 66.)
3) Hold down the RUN (or FWD or REV ) key to perform operation.
(If the motor remains stopped, check Pr. 13 "starting frequency". The motor will not
start if its setting is lower than the starting frequency.
70
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.3.3 External operation mode (Operation using the external
frequency setting potentiometer and external start signal)
(1) Operation at 60Hz
Operation command: Externally connected start signal
Frequency setting : Externally connected frequency setting potentiometer
<Connection diagram>
Frequency setting by voltage input Frequency setting by current input
STF STF *Short terminals AU-SD for
STR STR current input.
SD SD Use Pr.180 to Pr.183 (input
Frequency setting 10 Inverter AU * terminal function selection) to
2 Current input 4 Inverter
potentiometer assign the function of AU to any
5 4 to 20mADC 5
0 to 10VDC of RL, RM, RH or MRS terminal.
Refer to page 18 for details of each terminal.
Switch power on, refer to page 64, and set "2" in Pr. 79 ON
1 "operation mode selection".

Hz
The [EXT] indication is lit. MON
EXT
Start
Forward rotation
Set the start switch (STF or STR) to ON. Reverse
The [RUN] indication is lit to indicate forward rotation, or rotation
flickers to indicate reverse rotation. Hz RUN
2 MON
Note: The motor does not start if both the forward and EXT
reverse rotation switches are turned on. If both 3
switches are turned on during operation, the motor
decelerates to a stop.
Acceleration → Constant speed External potentiometer

Slowly turn the potentiometer connected across terminals 2-5
(4-5) (frequency setting potentiometer) fully clockwise.
3
The frequency shown on the display increases gradually to
60.00Hz.
Deceleration External potentiometer

(4-5) (frequency setting potentiometer) fully counterclockwise.
4
0.00Hz.
Stop Forward rotation
Turn off the start switch (STF or STR). Reverse
rotation
5 Stop
OFF
<Reference> If other frequency is required at fully clockwise position, change Pr. 38 "frequency
at 5V (10V)", Pr.39 "frequency at 20mA input" setting. (Refer to page 103.)
71
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.3.4 Combined operation mode 1 (Operation using both external
start signal and operation panel)
When the start signal is provided externally (switch, relay, etc.) and the running
frequency is set from the operation panel (Pr. 79 = 3).
The external frequency setting signal and PU's forward rotation, reverse rotation and
stop keys are not accepted. (Note)
Operation command: externally connected start signal
Frequency setting: Built-in frequency setting potentiometer or / key, or multi-speed
command (multi-speed command has priority) (Refer to page 88)
Related parameter: Pr. 146 "frequency setting command selection"
Power on
Switch power on.
ON
1
Operation mode selection

Refer to page 64 and set "3" in Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection".
2 Flicker
The [PU] and [EXT] indications are lit.
Start
Turn on the start switch (STF or STR). Forward rotation
Reverse
Note: The motor does not start if both the forward and rotation
reverse rotation switches are turned on. If both
3 Hz RUN
switches are turned on during operation, the motor ON MON
decelerates to a stop. PU EXT
The [RUN] indication is lit to indicate forward rotation,
or flickers to indicate reverse rotation.
Running frequency setting
Slowly turn the built-in frequency setting potentiometer fully
clockwise or set the running frequency to 60.00Hz with the
/ key.
Note: Use the built-in frequency setting potentiometer or
4 / key to make frequency setting.
Select the operation using Pr. 146 "frequency setting
command selection". <Step setting>
Pr. 146 = "0" (Built-in frequency setting potentiometer
valid)
Pr. 146 = "1" (Built-in frequency setting potentiometer
invalid) (Refer to page 65)
Stop
Turn off the start switch (STF or STR).
The motor stops. Hz
5
The [RUN] indication goes off. MON
PU EXT
STOP
Note: The RESET key is made valid if any of "14" to "17" is set in Pr. 75 "PU stop selection".
72
OPERATION/CONTROL
3.3.5 Combined operation mode 2
When the running frequency is set from a potentiometer connected across terminals 2-5
(frequency setting potentiometer) and the start signal is provided by the RUN key or FWD /
REV
key of the operation panel. (Pr.79 = 4)
Operation command: RUN key (or FWD / REV key) of the operation panel
Frequency setting:Externally connected frequency setting potentiometer or multi-speed
command (multi-speed command has priority) Refer to page 88.
Power on
Switch power on.
ON
1
Operation mode
Refer to page 64 and set "4" in Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection".
2 Flicker
The [PU] and [EXT] indications are lit.
Start
RUN
Press the RUN key (or FWD / REV key) of the operation panel.
3 The [RUN] indication is lit to indicate forward rotation, or flickers to FWD REV
Hz RUN
indicate reverse rotation. MON
PU EXT
3
Acceleration → Constant speed
Slowly turn the potentiometer connected across terminals 2-5 External potentiometer
(frequency setting potentiometer) fully clockwise.
4 The frequency shown on the display increases gradually to
60.00Hz.
Deceleration
External potentiometer
(frequency setting potentiometer) fully counterclockwise.
5
0.00Hz.
Stop
STOP
Hz
6 The operation command indication RUN goes off. MON
PU EXT
<Reference> If other frequency is required at fully clockwise position, change Pr. 38

"frequency at 5V (10V) " setting. (Refer to page 103.)
73
MEMO
74
CHAPTER 4
PARAMETERS
This chapter explains the "parameters" of this product.
With the factory settings, the inverter is designed to perform
simple variable-speed operation. Set necessary parameter
values according to the load and operating specifications. Chapter 1
4.1 Parameter List ......................................... 76 Chapter 2
4.2 Parameter Function Details ..................... 85
Chapter 3
Note: By making parameter setting, you can change the functions of
contact input terminals RL, RM, RH, MRS, open collector output
terminals RUN, FU, and contact output terminals A, B, C. Therefore,
signal names corresponding to the functions are used in the
description of this chapter (except in the wiring examples). Note that
they are not terminal names. Chapter 4
REMARKS
Chapter 5
Do not use the copy/verify function between this inverter and another
type (CC-Link type FR-E520-KN, DeviceNet type FR-E520-KND)
inverter.
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
75
PARAMETERS
4.1 Parameter List

4.1.1 Parameter list
Func- Param- Minimum Refer Custo-

Parameter List
Setting Factory
eter Name Setting mer
tion Range Setting To:
Number Increments Setting
6%/4%
0 Torque boost (Note 1) 0 to 30% 0.1% 85
(Note 10)
0.01Hz
1 Maximum frequency 0 to 120Hz 120Hz 86
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
2 Minimum frequency 0 to 120Hz 0Hz 86
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
3 Base frequency (Note 1) 0 to 400Hz 60Hz 87
(Note 3)
Basic functions
Multi-speed setting 0.01Hz

4 0 to 400Hz 60Hz 88
(high speed) (Note 3)
5 0 to 400Hz 30Hz 88
(middle speed) (Note 3)
6 0 to 400Hz 10Hz 88
(low speed) (Note 3)
0 to 3600 s/ 5 s/10s
7 Acceleration time 0.1 s/0.01 s 89
0 to 360 s (Note 4)
0 to 3600 s/ 5 s/10s
8 Deceleration time 0.1 s/0.01 s 89
0 to 360 s (Note 4)
Rated
Electronic thermal O/L output
9 0 to 500A 0.01A 91
relay current
(Note 5)
10 DC injection brake 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 3Hz 92
operation frequency (Note 3)
11 DC injection brake 0 to 10 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 92
operation time
12 DC injection brake voltage 0 to 30% 0.1% 6% 92
13 Starting frequency 0 to 60Hz 0.01Hz 0.5Hz 93
Load pattern selection
14 0 to 3 1 0 94
Standard operation functions
(Note 1)
0.01Hz
15 Jog frequency 0 to 400Hz 5Hz 95
(Note 3)
Jog acceleration/ 0 to 3600 s/
16 0.1 s/ 0.01 s 0.5 s 95
deceleration time 0 to 360 s
High-speed maximum 120 to 0.1Hz
18 120Hz 86
frequency 400Hz (Note 3)
Base frequency voltage 0 to 1000V,
19 0.1V 9999 87
(Note 1) 8888, 9999
Acceleration/deceleration 0.01Hz
20 1 to 400Hz 60Hz 89
reference frequency (Note 3)
Acceleration/deceleration
21 0, 1 1 0 89
time increments
Stall prevention operation
22 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 96
level
level compensation factor 0 to 200%,
23 0.1% 9999 96
at double speed 9999
(Note 6)
76
PARAMETERS
Param- Minimum Custo-
Func- Setting Factory Refer
Multi-speed setting 0 to 400Hz, 0.01Hz
24 9999 88
(speed 4) 9999 (Note 3)
25 9999 88
(speed 5) 9999 (Note 3)
Parameter List
26 9999 88
(speed 6) 9999 (Note 3)
27 9999 88
(speed 7) 9999 (Note 3)
Acceleration/deceleration
29 0, 1, 2 1 0 99
pattern
Regenerative function
30 0, 1 1 0 100
selection
0 to 400Hz, 0.01Hz
31 Frequency jump 1A 9999 101
9999 (Note 3)
0 to 400Hz, 0.01Hz
32 Frequency jump 1B 9999 101
9999 (Note 3)
0 to 400Hz, 0.01Hz
9999 (Note 3)
0 to 400Hz, 0.01Hz
9999 (Note 3)
0 to 400Hz, 0.01Hz
9999 (Note 3)
0 to 400Hz, 0.01Hz
9999 (Note 3)
0,
37 Speed display 0.001 r/min 0 102
0.01 to 9998
0.01Hz 60Hz
38 Frequency at 5V (10V) input 1 to 400Hz 103
(Note 3) (Note 2)
0.01Hz 60Hz
39 Frequency at 20mA input 1 to 400Hz 103
(Note 3) (Note 2)
41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 0 to 100% 0.1% 10% 104
functions
terminal
Output
42 Output frequency detection 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 6Hz 104

(Note 3)
43 Output frequency detection 0 to 400Hz, 0.01Hz 9999 104
for reverse rotation 9999 (Note 3)
Second acceleration/ 0 to 3600 s 5s/10s
44
deceleration time /0 to 360 s
0.1 s/0.01 s
(Note 11)
89 4
Second functions
0 to 3600 s
45 Second deceleration time /0 to 360 s, 0.1 s/0.01 s 9999 89
9999
Second torque boost 0 to 30%,
46 0.1% 9999 85
(Note 1) 9999
Second V/F (base 0 to 400Hz, 0.01Hz
47 9999 87
frequency) (Note 1) 9999 (Note 3)
Second electronic thermal 0 to 500A,
48 0.01A 9999 91
O/L relay 9999
Operation panel/PU main
52 0, 23, 100 1 0 105
Display functions
display data selection

FM terminal function
54 0, 1, 2 1 0 105
selection
Frequency monitoring
55 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz (Note 3) 60Hz 107
reference
Rated
Current monitoring
56 0 to 500A 0.01A output 107
reference
current
77
PARAMETERS
Additional Automatic
functions
57 Restart coasting time 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.1s 9999 108

restart
58 Restart cushion time 0 to 60 s 0.1s 1.0 s 108

Parameter List
function
Remote setting function

59 0, 1, 2 1 0 110
selection
Shortest acceleration/
60 0, 1, 2, 11, 12 1 0 113
deceleration mode
0 to 500A,
61 Reference current 0.01A 9999 113
9999
Reference current for 0 to 200%,
62 1% 9999 113
acceleration 9999
Reference current for 0 to 200%,
63 1% 9999 113
deceleration 9999
65 Retry selection 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 115
66 level reduction starting 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz (Note 3) 60Hz 96
frequency (Note 6)
Operation selection functions
Number of retries at alarm 0 to 10,

67 1 0 115
occurrence 101 to 110
68 Retry waiting time 0.1 to 360 s 0.1s 1s 115
69 Retry count display erasure 0 1 0 115
Special regenerative brake
70 duty 0 to 30% 0.1% 0% 100
0, 1, 3, 5, 6,
13, 15, 16, 23,
71 Applied motor (Note 6) 100, 101, 103, 1 0 117
105, 106, 113,
115, 116, 123,
72 PWM frequency selection 0 to 15 1 1 118
73 0-5V/0-10V selection 0, 1 1 0 120
74 Filter time constant 0 to 8 1 1 120
Reset selection/
75 disconnected PU detection/ 0 to 3, 1 14 121
14 to 17
PU stop selection
Parameter write disable
77 0, 1, 2 1 0 123
selection
78 Reverse rotation 0, 1, 2 1 0 124
prevention selection
79 Operation mode selection 0 to 4, 6 to 8 1 1 124
(Note 6)
80 Motor capacity (Note 6) 0.1 to 7.5kW, 0.01kW 9999 128
General-purpose magnetic
9999 (Note 8)
0 to 500A,
flux vector control
82 Motor excitation current 0.01A 9999 129

9999
83 Rated motor voltage 0 to 1000V 0.1V 200V/ 129
(Note 6) 400V
84 Rated motor frequency 50 to 120Hz 0.01Hz (Note 3) 60Hz 129
(Note 6)
90 Motor constant (R1) 0 to 50Ω, 0.001Ω 9999 129
9999
96 Auto-tuning setting/status 0, 1 1 0 129
(Note 6)
78
PARAMETERS
Communication station
117 0 to 31 1 0 135
number
118 Communication speed 48, 96, 192 1 192 135
Communication functions
Parameter List
0, 1
(data length 8)
119 Stop bit length 1 1 135
10, 11
(data length 7)
Parity check
120 0, 1, 2 1 2 135
presence/absence
Number of communication
121 0 to 10, 9999 1 1 135
retries
Communication check time 0, 0.1 to
122 0.1s 0 135
interval 999.8 s, 9999
0 to 150,
123 Waiting time setting 1 9999 135
9999
CR • LF presence/absence
124 0, 1, 2 1 1 135
selection
128 PID action selection 0, 20, 21 1 0 148
0.1 to 1000%,
129 PID proportional band 0.1% 100% 148
9999
0.1 to 3600 s,
130 PID integral time 0.1 s 1s 148
9999
PID control
0 to 100%,
131 Upper limit 0.1% 9999 148
9999
0 to 100%,
132 Lower limit 0.1% 9999 148
9999
PID action set point for PU
133 0 to 100% 0.01% 0% 148
operation
0.01 to
134 PID differential time 0.01 s 9999 148
10.00 s, 9999
Parameter for option (FR-PU04).
Additional
145
function
Frequency setting
146 0, 1, 9999 1 0 156
command selection
Current detection
Output current detection

150 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 157
level 4
Output current detection
151 0 to 10 s 0.1 s 0 157
period
152 Zero current detection level 0 to 200.0% 0.1% 5.0% 158
Zero current detection
153 period 0.05 to 1 s 0.01 s 0.5 s 158
monitor function function
Sub
156 Stall prevention operation 0 to 31,100 1 0 96

selection
Initial Additional
160 User group read selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 159

168
Parameters set by manufacturer. Do not set.
169
Actual operation hour

171 meter clear 0  0 161
79
PARAMETERS
173 User group 1 registration 0 to 999 1 0 159
User functions
174 User group 1 deletion 0 to 999, 1 0 159

9999
Parameter List
175 User group 2 registration 0 to 999 1 0 159

0 to 999,
176 User group 2 deletion 1 0 159
9999
RL terminal function
180 0 to 8, 16, 18 1 0 161
selection (Note 6)
RM terminal function
181 0 to 8, 16, 18 1 1 161
assignment functions
selection (Note 6)
RH terminal function
182 0 to 8, 16, 18 1 2 161
selection (Note 6)
Terminal
MRS terminal function

183 0 to 8, 16, 18 1 6 161
selection (Note 6)
RUN terminal function
190 0 to 99 1 0 163
selection (Note 6)
FU terminal function
191 0 to 99 1 4 163
selection (Note 6)
A, B, C terminal function
192 0 to 99 1 99 163
selection (Note 6)
232 9999 88
(speed 8) 9999 (Note 3)
233 9999 88
(speed 9) 9999 (Note 3)
Multi-speed operation

234 9999 88
(speed 10) 9999 (Note 3)
235 9999 88
(speed 11) 9999 (Note 3)
236 9999 88
(speed 12) 9999 (Note 3)
237 9999 88
(speed 13) 9999 (Note 3)
238 9999 88
(speed 14) 9999 (Note 3)
239 9999 88
(speed 15) 9999 (Note 3)
0, 1, 10, 11
240 Soft-PWM setting 1 1 118
(Note 12)
Cooling fan operation
244 0, 1 1 0 164
selection
Sub functions
0 to 50%,
245 Rated motor slip 0.01% 9999 165
9999
Slip compensation
246 0.01 to 10 s 0.01 s 0.5 s 165
response time
Constant-output region slip
247 0, 9999 1 9999 165
compensation selection
Earth (ground) fault
249 0, 1 1 0 166
detection at start (Note 9)
selection
function
0 to 100 s,
Stop
1000 to
250 Stop selection 1 9999 167
1100 s,
8888, 9999
80
PARAMETERS
Capacitor Additional
Output phase failure

function
251 0, 1 1 1 168
protection selection
342 2 0, 1 1 0 135
E PROM write selection
Parameter List
1
503 Capacitor life timer (Note 9) — 0 169
(100h)
life
Capacitor life alarm output 0 to 9998, 1 500

504 169
set time (Note 9) (9999) (100h) (50000h)
900 FM terminal calibration    170
902 Frequency setting voltage 0 to 0 to 0.01Hz 0V 0Hz 172
bias 10V 60Hz
Frequency setting voltage 0 to 1 to 60
Calibration functions
903 0.01Hz 5V 172

gain 10V 400Hz Hz
904 Frequency setting current 0 to 0 to 0.01Hz 4 0Hz 172
bias 20mA 60Hz mA
905 Frequency setting current 0 to 1 to 0.01Hz 20 60 172
gain 20mA 400Hz mA Hz
922 Built-in frequency setting 0 to 0 to 0.01Hz 0V 0Hz 172
potentiometer bias 5V 60Hz
923 Built-in frequency setting 0 to 1 to 0.01Hz 5V 60 172
potentiometer gain 5V 400Hz Hz
990
Parameter for options (FR-PU04).
991
Note: 1. Indicates the parameter of which setting is ignored when the general-
purpose magnetic flux vector control mode is selected.
2. Since calibration is made before shipment from the factory, the settings
differ slightly between inverters. The inverter is preset to provide a
frequency slightly higher than 60Hz.
3. When the operation panel is used and the setting is 100Hz or more, the
setting increments are 0.1Hz.
The setting increments are 0.01Hz when operating in the communication
mode. 4
4. The setting varies according to the inverter capacity: (0.1K to 3.7K)/(5.5K to
7.5K).
5. The 0.1K to 0.75K are set to 85% of the rated inverter current.
6. If "2" is set in Pr. 77 (parameter write disable selection), the setting cannot
be changed during operation.
7. The shaded parameters allow their settings to be changed during operation
if "0" (factory setting) has been set in Pr. 77 (parameter write disable
selection). (However, the Pr. 72 and Pr. 240 values may be changed during
PU operation only.)
8. The Pr. 80 setting range changes with the inverter class: 0.2kW to 7.5kW,
9999 for the 400V class.
9. Pr. 249, Pr. 503, Pr. 504 can be set for the 200V/100V class only.
10.The factory setting of Pr. 0 changes with the inverter capacity: 4% for the
FR-E540-5.5K, 7.5K.
11. For the FR-E540-5.5K and 7.5K, the factory setting is 10s.
12.The setting values "10, 11" can be set for the 400V class only.
81
PARAMETERS
4.1.2 List of parameters classified by purpose of use
Set the parameters according to the operating conditions. The following list indicates
purpose of use and corresponding parameters.
Parameter Numbers
Purpose of Use
Parameter numbers which must be set
Operation mode selection Pr. 79, Pr. 146
Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern
Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 29
adjustment
Selection of output characteristics
Pr. 3, Pr. 14, Pr. 19
optimum for load characteristics
Output frequency restriction (limit) Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18
Pr. 1, Pr. 18, Pr. 38, Pr. 39, Pr. 903, Pr. 905,
Operation over 60Hz
Pr. 923
Adjustment of frequency setting Pr. 38, Pr. 39, Pr. 73, Pr. 902 to Pr. 905, Pr.
signals and outputs 922, Pr. 923
Related to operation
Motor output torque adjustment Pr. 0, Pr. 80

Brake operation adjustment Pr. 10, Pr. 11, Pr. 12
Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 4, Pr. 5, Pr. 6, Pr. 15, Pr. 24,
Multi-speed operation Pr. 25, Pr. 26, Pr. 27, Pr. 232, Pr. 233, Pr. 234,
Pr. 235, Pr. 236, Pr. 237, Pr. 238, Pr. 239
Jog operation Pr. 15, Pr. 16
Frequency jump operation Pr. 31, Pr. 32, Pr. 33, Pr. 34, Pr. 35, Pr. 36
Automatic restart operation after
Pr. 57, Pr. 58
instantaneous power failure
Optimum acceleration/deceleration
Pr. 60
within continuous rated range
Slip compensation setting Pr. 245 to Pr. 247
Output stop method selection Pr. 250
Setting of output characteristics
Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 71
matching the motor
Stall prevention of motor, lift operation Pr. 156
General-purpose magnetic flux vector
Related to application operation
Pr. 80
control operation
Electromagnetic brake operation timing Pr. 42, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
Offline auto tuning setting Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96
Pr. 0, Pr. 3, Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 9, Pr. 44, Pr. 45,
Sub-motor operation
Pr. 46, Pr. 47, Pr. 48
Regenerative function selection Pr. 30, Pr. 70
Operation in communication with
Pr. 117 to Pr. 124, Pr. 342
personal computer
Pr. 73, Pr. 79, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134,
Operation under PID control
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
Noise reduction Pr. 72, Pr. 240
82
PARAMETERS
Parameter Numbers
Purpose of Use
Parameter numbers which must be set
Frequency meter calibration Pr. 54, Pr. 55, Pr. 56, Pr. 900
monitoring
Related to
Display of monitor on operation panel

Pr. 54, Pr. 55, Pr. 56, Pr. 900
or parameter unit (FR-PU04)
Display of speed, etc. Pr. 37, Pr. 52
Clearing of inverter's actual operation
Pr. 171
time
operation prevention
Related to incorrect
Function write prevention Pr. 77

Reverse rotation prevention Pr. 78
Parameter grouping Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 176

Current detection Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
Motor stall prevention Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66, Pr. 156
Input terminal function assignment Pr. 180 to Pr. 183

Output terminal function assignment Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
Increased cooling fan life Pr. 244
Motor protection from overheat Pr. 9, Pr. 71
Automatic restart operation at alarm
Others
Pr. 65, Pr. 67, Pr. 68, Pr. 69

stop
Earth (ground) fault overcurrent setting Pr. 249
Inverter reset selection Pr. 75
Output phase failure protection
Pr. 251
selection
To determine the replacement time of
Pr. 503, Pr. 504
capacitor
83
PARAMETERS
4.1.3 Parameters recommended to be set by the user
We recommend the following parameters to be set by the user.
Set them according to the operation specifications, load, etc.
Parameter
Name Application
Number
1 Maximum frequency Used to set the maximum and minimum output
2 Minimum frequency frequencies.
7 Acceleration time Used to set the acceleration and deceleration
8 Deceleration time times.
Used to set the current of the electronic
Electronic thermal O/L
9 overcurrent protection to protect the motor from
relay
overheat.
Used to select the optimum output
14 Load pattern selection characteristics which match the application and
load characteristics.
Used to set the thermal characteristics of the
71 Applied motor electronic overcurrent protection according to
the motor used.
Used to select the specifications of the
frequency setting signal entered across terminal
73 0-5V/0-10V selection
2-5 to perform operation with the voltage input
signal.
Select whether the output frequency setting is
Frequency setting the setting using the built-in frequency setting
146
command selection potentiometer or the digital setting using the
/ key.
In vertical lift applications, make setting so that
the high-response current limit is not activated.
Stall prevention
156 When high response current restriction is
operation selection
activated, torque may not be produced, causing
a gravity drop.
Used to calibrate the meter connected across
900 FM terminal calibration
terminals FM-SD.
Frequency setting
902
voltage bias
Frequency setting Used to set the magnitude (slope) of the output
903
voltage gain frequency relative to the frequency setting
Frequency setting signal
904 (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA DC) as desired.
current bias
Frequency setting
905
current gain
Built-in frequency setting You can set the magnitude (slope) of the output
922
potentiometer bias frequency relative to the built-in frequency
Built-in frequency setting setting potentiometer of the operation panel as
923 desired.
potentiometer gain
84
PARAMETERS
4.2 Parameter Function Details

4.2.1 Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46)
Pr. 0 "torque boost" Related parameters
Pr. 46 "second torque boost" Pr. 3 "base frequency"
Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage"
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Increase the setting when the inverter-to- Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
motor distance is long or motor torque in Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal
the low-speed range is insufficient, for function selection)
example;
z Motor torque in the low-frequency range
can be adjusted to the load to increase the starting motor torque.
z You can select either of the two starting torque boosts by RT terminal switching.
Parameter Factory Setting Range Remarks
Number Setting
(Note) FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K: 6%
6%/4% FR-E520 (S)-0.1K to 7.5K: 6%
0 0 to 30%
(Note) FR-E540-0.4K to 3.7K: 6%
FR-E540-5.5K, 7.5K : 4%
46 9999 0 to 30%, 9999 9999: Function invalid
Output voltage
100%
Pr.0
Pr.46
Setting range Base frequency
0 Output frequency (Hz)
<Setting>
• Assuming that the base frequency voltage is 100%, set the 0Hz voltage in %.
4
• Pr. 46 "second torque boost" is valid when the RT signal is on. (Note 3)
• When using the inverter-dedicated motor (constant-torque motor), change the setting
as indicated below:
FR-E520 (S)-0.1K to 0.75K, FR-E540-0.4K, 0.75K, FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K ................6%
FR-E520-1.5K to 7.5K, FR-E540-1.5K to 3.7K.........................................................4%
FR-E540-5.5K, 7.5K .................................................................................................3%
If you leave the factory setting as it is and change the Pr. 71 value to the setting for
use of the constant-torque motor, the Pr. 0 setting changes to the above value.
Note: 1. This parameter setting is ignored when the general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control mode has been selected.
2. A large setting may result in an overheated motor or overcurrent trip. The
guideline for the largest value for this parameter is about 10%.
3. The RT signal serves as the second function selection signal and makes the
other second functions valid. Refer to page 161 for Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input
terminal function selection).
85
PARAMETERS
4.2.2 Output frequency range (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18)
Pr. 1 "maximum frequency" Related parameters
Pr. 2 "minimum frequency" Pr. 13 "starting frequency"
Pr. 38 "frequency at 5V (10V)
Pr. 18 "high-speed maximum
input"
frequency"
Pr. 39 "frequency at 20mA input"
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Used to clamp the upper and lower
Pr. 146 "frequency setting
limits of the output frequency. Used for
high-speed operation at or over 120Hz. command selection"
z Can be used to set the upper and lower limits of motor speed.
Parameter Factory Setting

Output frequency
Number Setting Range
1 120Hz 0 to 120Hz
Pr.1
2 0Hz 0 to 120Hz Pr.18
120 to Pr.2 Frequency setting
18 120Hz
400Hz 0 5,10V
(4mA) (20mA)
<Setting>
• Use Pr. 1 to set the upper limit of the output frequency. If the frequency of the
frequency command entered is higher than the setting, the output frequency is
clamped at the maximum frequency.
• To perform operation over 120Hz, set the upper limit of the output frequency in Pr. 18.
(When the Pr. 18 value is set, Pr. 1 automatically changes to the frequency in Pr. 18.
Also, when the Pr. 1 value is set, Pr. 18 automatically changes to the frequency in Pr.
1.)
• Use Pr. 2 to set the lower limit of the output frequency.
Note: When the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) connected across
terminals 2-5 is used for operation beyond 60Hz, change the value of Pr. 38 (or
Pr. 39 for use of the potentiometer connected across terminals 4-5).
Alternatively, when the built-in frequency setting potentiometer (Pr.146 = 0) is
used for operation beyond 60Hz, change the Pr. 923 value.
Operation over 60Hz cannot be performed by merely changing the settings of
Pr. 1 and Pr. 18.
CAUTION
If the Pr. 2 setting is higher than the Pr. 13 "starting frequency" value,
note that the motor will run at the set frequency according to the
acceleration time setting by merely switching the start signal on, without
entry of the command frequency.
86
PARAMETERS
4.2.3 Base frequency, base frequency voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47)
Pr. 3 "base frequency" Related parameters
Pr. 14 "load pattern selection"
Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage"
Pr. 47 "second V/F(base frequency) Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage"
Used to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage,
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal
frequency) to the motor rating.
z When running a standard motor, function selection)
generally set the rated motor frequency.
When running the motor using the commercial power supply-inverter switch-over, set
the base frequency to the same value as the power supply frequency.
z If the frequency given on the motor rating plate is "50Hz" only, always set to "50Hz".
Leaving it as "60Hz" may make the voltage too low and the torque less, resulting in
overload tripping. Care must be taken especially when Pr. 14 "load pattern selection = 1.
Remarks
3 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
0 to 1000V, 8888: 95% of power supply voltage *1
19 9999
8888, 9999 9999: Same as power supply voltage *2
47 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999: Function invalid
9999
*1: The base frequency voltage of the FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K is 1.9 times larger than
the power supply voltage.
*2: The base frequency voltage of the FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K is 2 times larger than
the power supply voltage.
Output voltage
Pr.19
Output
frequency (Hz)
Pr.3
Pr.47
4
<Setting>
• Use Pr. 3 and Pr. 47 to set the base frequency (rated motor frequency). Two base
frequencies can be set and the required frequency can be selected from them.
• Pr. 47 "second V/F (base frequency)" is valid when the RT signal is on. (Note 3)
• Use Pr. 19 to set the base voltage (e.g. rated motor voltage).
Note: 1. Set 60Hz in Pr. 3 "base frequency" when using a Mitsubishi constant-torque
motor.
2. When the general-purpose magnetic flux vector control mode has been
selected, Pr. 3, Pr. 19 and Pr. 47 are made invalid and Pr. 83 and Pr. 84 are
made valid.
However, Pr. 3 or Pr. 47 is made valid for the S-shaped inflection pattern
point of Pr. 29.
87
PARAMETERS
4.2.4 Multi-speed operation
(Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)
Pr. 4 "multi-speed setting (high speed)" Related parameters
Pr. 1 "maximum frequency"
Pr. 5 "multi-speed setting (middle speed)" Pr. 2 "minimum frequency"
Pr. 29 "acceleration/
Pr. 6 "multi-speed setting (low speed)" deceleration pattern"
Pr. 79 "operation mode
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 "multi-speed setting selection"
(speeds 4 to 7)" Pr. 146 "frequency setting
command selection"
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 "multi-speed setting Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal
(speeds 8 to 15)" function selection)
Used to switch between the predetermined running speeds.
z Any speed can be selected by merely switching on/off the corresponding contact
signals (RH, RM, RL, REX signals).
z By using these functions with Pr. 1 "maximum frequency" and Pr. 2 "minimum
frequency", up to 17 speeds can be set.
z Valid in the external operation mode or combined mode (Pr. 79 = 3 or 4)
.
Parameter
Factory Setting Setting Range Remarks
Number
4 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
5 30Hz 0 to 400Hz
6 10Hz 0 to 400Hz
24 to 27 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 9999: Not selected
232 to 239 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 9999: Not selected
Speed 1
Output frequency(Hz)
(high speed) Speed 10

Speed 5
Speed 2 Speed 11
(middle speed) Speed 6 Speed 9 Speed 12
Speed 4 Speed 13
Speed 3 Speed 8
(low speed) Speed 14
Speed 7 Speed 15
Time Time
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RH RH
RM RM
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RL RL
REX
(Note 7)
<Setting>
• Set the running frequencies in the corresponding parameters.
• Each speed (frequency) can be set as desired between 0 and 400Hz during inverter
operation.
After the required multi-speed setting parameter has been read, the setting can be
changed by pressing the / key. In this case, when you release the / key,
press the SET key ( key when using the parameter unit (FR-PU04)) to store the set
WRITE
frequency.
• Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 to assign the terminal used to input the REX signal.
88
PARAMETERS
Note: 1. The priorities of external terminal of the frequency command are in order of
jog, multi-speed, terminal 4 and terminal 2.
2. The multi-speeds can also be set in the PU or external operation mode.
3. For 3-speed setting, if two or three speeds are simultaneously selected,
priority is given to the frequency setting of the lower signal.
4. Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 settings have no priority between them.
5. The parameter values can be changed during operation.
6. When input terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, other
functions may be affected. Check the functions of the corresponding
terminals before making setting.
7. When only the REX signal is on with "9999" set in Pr.232, the set frequency
is changed to 0Hz.
4.2.5 Acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr.
44, Pr. 45)
Pr. 7 "acceleration time" Related parameters
Pr. 8 "deceleration time" Pr. 3 "base frequency"
Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration
pattern"
reference frequency"
Pr. 21 "acceleration/deceleration time increments"
Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time"
Pr. 45 "second deceleration time"
Used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time.
Set a larger value for a slower speed increase/decrease or a smaller value for a faster
speed increase/decrease.
Parameter
Number
0.1K to 3.7K 5s
7 0 to 3600s/0 to 360s
5.5K, 7.5K 10s
8
0.1K to 3.7K 5s
0 to 3600s/0 to 360s 4
5.5K, 7.5K 10s
20 60Hz 1 to 400Hz
0: 0 to 3600s
21 0 0, 1 1: 0 to 360s
44 5s (Note) 0 to 3600s/0 to 360s
0 to 3600s/ 9999: acceleration time =
45 9999
0 to 360s, 9999 deceleration time
Note: The FR-E540-5.5K and 7.5K are factory-set to 10s.
Output frequency
(Hz)
Pr.20
Running frequency
Time
Pr.7 Pr.8
Pr.44 Acceleration Deceleration Pr.45
89
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
• Use Pr. 21 to set the acceleration/deceleration time and minimum setting
increments:
Set value "0" (factory setting) ........0 to 3600s (minimum setting increments: 0.1s)
Set value "1"..................................0 to 360s (minimum setting increments: 0.01s)
• When you have changed the Pr. 21 setting, set the deceleration time again. (Note 5)
• Use Pr. 7 and Pr. 44 to set the acceleration time required to reach the frequency set in
Pr. 20 from 0Hz.
• Use Pr. 8 and Pr. 45 to set the deceleration time required to reach 0Hz from the
frequency set in Pr. 20.
• Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 are valid when the RT signal is on. When the RT signal is on, the
other second functions such as second torque boost are also selected.
• Set "9999" in Pr. 45 to make the deceleration time equal to the acceleration time (Pr.
44).
Note: 1. In S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A (refer to page 99), the set
time is the period required to reach the base frequency set in Pr. 3.
•Acceleration/deceleration time formula when the set frequency is the base
frequency or higher
4 T 2 5
t= (Pr. 3) 2 f + 9 T
9
T: Acceleration/deceleration time setting (s)
f : Set frequency (Hz)
•Guideline for acceleration/deceleration time at the base frequency of 60Hz
(0Hz to set frequency)
Frequency setting (Hz)
60 120 200 400
Acceleration/
deceleration time (s)
5 5 12 27 102
15 15 35 82 305
2. If the Pr. 20 setting is changed, the settings of calibration functions Pr. 903
and Pr. 905 (frequency setting signal gains) remain unchanged.
To adjust the gains, adjust calibration functions Pr. 903 and Pr. 905.
3. When the setting of Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 44 or Pr. 45 is "0", the acceleration/
deceleration time is 0.04s. At this time, set 120Hz or less in Pr. 20.
4. If the shortest acceleration/deceleration time is set, the actual motor
acceleration/deceleration time cannot be made shorter than the shortest
acceleration/deceleration time determined by the mechanical system's J
(inertia moment) and motor torque.
5. Changing the Pr. 21 setting changes the acceleration/deceleration setting
(Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 16, Pr. 44, Pr. 45).
<Example>
When Pr. 21 = "0" and the setting of Pr. 7 = "5.0"s, and if the setting of Pr. 21
is changed to "1", the setting value of Pr. 7 will change to "0.5"s.
90
PARAMETERS
4.2.6 Electronic thermal relay function (Pr. 9, Pr. 48)
Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay
Related parameter
Pr. 48 "second electronic thermal Pr. 71 "applied motor"
O/L relay " Pr. 180 to Pr. 183
(input terminal function
selection)
Set the current of the electronic thermal relay function to protect the motor from
overheat. This feature provides the optimum protective characteristics, including
reduced motor cooling capability, at low speed.
Parameter
Number
Rated output
9 0 to 500A
current*
48 9999 0 to 500A, 9999 9999: Function invalid
*0.1K to 0.75K are set to 85% of the rated inverter current.
<Setting>
• Set the rated current [A] of the motor.
(Normally set the rated current at 50Hz if the motor has both 50Hz and 60Hz rated
current.)
• Setting "0" makes the electronic thermal relay function (motor protective function)
invalid. (The inverter's protective function is valid.)
• Set "1" in Pr.71 when using the Mitsubishi constant torque motor. (This provides a
100% continuous torque characteristic in the low-speed region.) Then, set the rated
motor current in Pr. 9.
• Pr. 48 "second electronic thermal O/L relay" is made valid when the RT signal is on.
(Note 4)
4
Note: 1. When two or more motors are connected to the inverter, they cannot be
protected by the electronic overcurrent protection. Install an external
thermal relay to each motor.
2. When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and
the setting is small, the protective characteristics of the electronic thermal
relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal
relay.
3. A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function.
Use an external thermal relay.
91
PARAMETERS
4.2.7 DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12)
Pr. 10 "DC injection brake operation frequency"
Pr. 11 "DC injection brake operation time"
Pr. 12 "DC injection brake voltage"
By setting the DC injection brake voltage (torque), operation time and operation starting
frequency, the stopping accuracy of positioning operation, etc. or the timing of operating
the DC injection brake to stop the motor can be adjusted according to the load.
Output frequency (Hz)

10 3Hz 0 to 120Hz
11 0.5s 0 to 10 s
12 6% 0 to 30% Operation
Pr.10
frequency
Time
DC injection Pr.12
brake voltage Operation
voltage Time
Pr.11 Operation time
<Setting>
• Use Pr. 10 to set the frequency at which the DC injection brake operation is started.
• Use Pr. 11 to set the period during when the brake is operated.
• Use Pr. 12 to set the percentage of the power supply voltage.
• Change the Pr. 12 setting when using the inverter-dedicated motor (constant-torque
motor).
FR-E520 (S)-0.1K to 7.5K, FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K ......................... 4% (Note)
FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K .......................................................................... 6%
Note: When the Pr. 12 value is as factory-set, changing the Pr. 71 value to the setting
for use of a constant-torque motor changes the Pr. 12 value to 4%
automatically.
CAUTION
Install a mechanical brake. No holding torque is provided.
92
PARAMETERS
4.2.8 Starting frequency (Pr. 13)
Pr. 13 "starting frequency" Related parameters
Pr. 2 "minimum frequency"
You can set the starting frequency between 0 and 60Hz.

• Set the starting frequency at which the start signal is switched on.
Output frequency
Parameter Factory Setting (Hz)
Setting range
60
13 0.5Hz 0 to 60Hz
Pr.13
0 Time
Frequency setting signal(V)
Foward rotation ON
Note: The inverter will not start if the frequency setting signal is less than the value
set in Pr. 13 "starting frequency".
For example, when 5Hz is set in Pr. 13, the motor will not start running until the
frequency setting signal reaches 5Hz.
CAUTION
When the Pr. 13 setting is equal to or less than the Pr. 2 "minimum
frequency" value, note that merely switching on the start signal will start
the motor at the preset frequency even if the command frequency is not
input.
4
93
PARAMETERS
4.2.9 Load pattern selection (Pr. 14)
Pr. 14 "load pattern selection" Related parameters
Pr. 0 "torque boost"
Pr. 46 "second torque boost"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183
(input terminal function
selection)
You can select the optimum output characteristic (V/F characteristic) for the application
and load characteristics.
14 0 0 to 3
Pr.14=0 Pr.14=1
For constant-torque loads For variable-torque loads
(e.g. conveyor, cart) (Fan, pump)
100% 100%
Output Output
voltage voltage
Base frequency Base frequency

Output frequency (Hz) Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.14=2 Pr.14=3
For lift For lift
Boost for forward rotation...Pr. 0 (Pr.46) setting Boost for forward rotation...0%
Boost for reverse rotation...0% Boost for reverse rotation...Pr. 0 (Pr.46) setting
100% 100%
Forward Reverse
Output rotation Output rotation
voltage voltage
Pr.0 Reverse Pr.0 Forward

rotation rotation
Pr.46 Pr.46
Base frequency Base frequency
Note: 1. This parameter setting is ignored when the general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control mode has been selected.
2. Pr. 46 "second torque boost" is made valid when the RT signal turns on.
The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the
other second functions valid.
Refer to page 161 for Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection).
94
PARAMETERS
4.2.10 Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16)
Pr. 15 "jog frequency" Related parameters
Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/
reference frequency"
deceleration time"
time increments"
Jog operation can be started and stopped by selecting the jog mode from the operation
panel and pressing and releasing the RUN key ( FWD , REV key).
• Set the frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation.

Remarks
15 5Hz 0 to 400Hz
0 to 3600 s When Pr. 21 = 0
16 0.5s
0 to 360 s When Pr. 21 = 1

Pr.20
Jog frequency
Pr.15 Forward Reverse
setting range Time
rotation rotation
Pr.16
ON
FWD key
ON
REV key
Note: 1. In S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A, the acceleration/ 4

deceleration time is the period of time required to reach Pr. 3 "base
frequency", not Pr. 20.
2. The acceleration time and deceleration time cannot be set separately for jog
operation.
3. The value set in Pr. 15 "jog frequency" should be equal to or greater than
the Pr. 13 "starting frequency" setting.
Pr. 18 Î Refer to Pr. 1, Pr. 2.

Pr. 19 Î Refer to Pr. 3.
Pr. 20, Pr. 21 Î Refer to Pr. 7, Pr. 8.
95
PARAMETERS
4.2.11 Stall prevention and current restriction (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66,
Pr. 156)
Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation level"

Pr. 23 "stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed"
Pr. 66 "stall prevention operation level reduction starting frequency"
Pr. 156 "stall prevention operation selection"
• Stall prevention............If the current exceeds the stall prevention operation level, the
output frequency of the inverter is automatically varied to
reduce the current.
• High-response current limit ......... If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of
the inverter is shut off to prevent an overcurrent.
• Set the output current level (% to the inverter rated current) at which the output
frequency will be adjusted to prevent the inverter from stopping due to overcurrent etc.
• For high-speed operation at or over the motor base frequency, acceleration may not
be made because the motor current does not increase.
To improve the operation characteristics of the motor in such a case, the stall
prevention level in the high-frequency range can be reduced. This is effective for
operation of a centrifugal separator up to the high-speed range. Normally, set 60Hz in
Pr. 66 and 100% in Pr. 23.
• For operation in the high-frequency range, the current in the locked motor state is
smaller than the rated output current of the inverter and the inverter does not result in
an alarm (protective function is not activated) if the motor is at a stop. To improve this
and activate the alarm, the stall prevention level can be reduced.
• You can make setting to prevent stall caused by overcurrent and/or to prevent the
inverter from resulting in an overcurrent trip (to disable high-response current
restriction that limits the current) when an excessive current flows due to sudden load
fluctuation or ON-OFF on the output side of a running inverter.
Parameter Number Factory Setting Setting Range Remarks
22 150% 0 to 200%
0 to 200%, 9999: Constant
23 9999
9999 according to Pr. 22
66 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
156 0 0 to 31, 100
Pr.22 Setting example

Pr.23 =9999 (Pr.22=150%, Pr.23=100%, Pr.66=60Hz)
operation level (%)
operation level (%)
150
Stall prevention
Reduction ratio
Current limit
compensation 90
factor (%)
60
45
30
Pr.23 22.5
Pr.66 400Hz 0 60 100 200 300 400
96
PARAMETERS
<Setting of stall prevention operation level>
• In Pr. 22, set the stall prevention operation level. Normally set it to 150% (factory
setting). Set "0" in Pr. 22 to disable the stall prevention operation.
• To reduce the stall prevention operation level in the high-frequency range, set the
reduction starting frequency in Pr. 66 and the reduction ratio compensation factor in
Pr. 23.
Formula for stall prevention operation level

Pr. 22-A Pr. 23-100
Stall prevention operation level (%) = A + B × [ ]×[ ]
Pr. 22-B 100
Pr. 66 (Hz) × Pr. 22 (%) Pr. 66 (Hz) × Pr. 22 (%)

where, A = output frequency (Hz) ,B= 400Hz
• By setting "9999" (factory setting) in Pr. 23, the stall prevention operation level is
constant at the Pr. 22 setting up to 400Hz.
<Setting of stall prevention operation selection>
Refer to the following table and set the parameter.
Stall Prevention Stall Prevention
Operation OL Signal Operation OL Signal
Selection Output Selection Output
High- {: High- {:
Response {: Activated Response {: Activated
Current z: Not activated Operation
Current z: Not activated Operation
Pr. 156 continued Pr. 156 continued
Acceleration
Deceleration
Acceleration
Deceleration
Limit Limit
Setting z: Setting z:
{: Activated Operation {: Activated Operation
Constant
Constant
z: Not z: Not
not not
activated activated
speed
speed
continued continued
(Note 1) (Note 1)
0 { { { { { 16 { { { { z
1 z { { { { 17 z { { { z
2 { z { { { 18 { z { { z
3 z z { { { 19 z z { { z
4 { { z { { 20 { { z { z 4
5 z { z { { 21 z { z { z
6 { z z { { 22 { z z { z
7 z z z { { 23 z z z { z
8 { { { z { 24 { { { z z
9 z { { z { 25 z { { z z
10 { z { z { 26 { z { z z
11 z z { z { 27 z z { z z
12 { { z z { 28 { { z z z
13 z { z z { 29 z { z z z
14 { z z z { 30 { z z z z
15 z z z z { 31 z z z z z
Regenerative Driving
{ { { { {
100
z z z z {
97
PARAMETERS
Note: 1. When "Operation not continued for OL signal output" is selected using
Pr.156, the "E.OLT" alarm code (stopped by stall prevention) is displayed
and operation stopped.
(Alarm stop display "E.OLT")
2. If the load is heavy, the lift is predetermined, or the acceleration/deceleration
time is short, the stall prevention may be activated and the motor not
stopped in the preset acceleration/deceleration time. Therefore, set
optimum values to the Pr. 156 and Pr. 22 (Pr. 23).
3. When the high-response current limit has been set in Pr. 156 (factory setting
has the current limit activated), do not set the Pr. 22 value to 170% or more.
Torque will not be developed by doing so.
4. In vertical lift applications, make setting so that the high-response current
limit is not activated. Torque may not be produced, causing a gravity drop.
CAUTION
Do not set a small value as the stall prevention operation current.
Otherwise, torque generated will reduce.
Test operation must be performed.
Stall prevention operation during acceleration may increase the
acceleration time.
Stall prevention operation during constant speed may change the speed
suddenly.
Stall prevention operation during deceleration may increase the
deceleration time, increasing the deceleration distance.
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 ÎRefer to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6.
98
PARAMETERS
4.2.12 Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29)
Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration Related parameters
pattern" Pr. 3 "base frequency"
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 8 "deceleration time"
Set the acceleration/deceleration pattern. reference frequency"
Parameter Factory Setting Pr. 44 "second
Number Setting Range acceleration/deceleration time"
29 0 0, 1, 2 Pr. 45 "second deceleration time"
Set value 0 Set value 1 Set value 2

[Linear acceleration/deceleration] [S-shaped [S-shaped
acceleration/deceleration A] acceleration/deceleration B]
frequency(Hz)
frequency(Hz)
frequency(Hz)
f1
Output
Output
Output
fb
f2
Time Time Time
<Setting>
Pr. 29 Setting Function Description
Linear Linear acceleration/deceleration is made up/down to the
0 acceleration/ preset frequency (factory setting).
deceleration
For machine tool spindles
This setting is used when it is necessary to make
S-shaped acceleration/deceleration in a short time up to the base
acceleration/ frequency or higher speed range. 4
1 deceleration In this acceleration/deceleration pattern, fb (base
A frequency) is always the inflection point of an S shape,
(Note) and you can set the acceleration/deceleration time
according to the reduction in motor torque in the base
frequency or higher constant-output operation range.
For prevention of cargo collapse on conveyor, etc.
S-shaped
This setting provides S-shaped acceleration/deceleration
acceleration/
2 from f2 (current frequency) to f1 (target frequency),
deceleration
easing an acceleration/deceleration shock. This pattern
B
has an effect on the prevention of cargo collapse, etc.
Note: For the acceleration/deceleration time, set the time required to reach the "base
frequency" in Pr. 3, not the "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency" in
Pr. 20.
99
PARAMETERS
4.2.13 Regenerative brake duty (Pr. 30, Pr. 70)
Pr. 30 "regenerative function selection"
Pr. 70 "special regenerative brake duty"
• When making frequent starts/stops, use the optional "brake resistor" to increase the
regenerative brake duty. (0.4K or more)

30 0 0,1
70 0% 0 to 30%
<Setting>
(1) When using the brake resistor (MRS), BU type brake unit, high power
factor converter (FR-HC), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
• Set "0" in Pr. 30.
• The Pr. 70 setting is made invalid.
(2) When using the brake resistors (2 MYSs in parallel) (3.7K is only
allowed)
• Set "1" in Pr. 30.
• Set "6%" in Pr. 70.
(3) When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)

• Set "1" in Pr. 30.
• Set "10%" in Pr. 70.
Note: 1. Pr. 70 "regenerative brake duty" indicates the %ED of the built-in brake
transistor operation. The setting should not be higher than the permissible
value of the brake resistor used. Otherwise, the resistor can overheat.
2. When Pr. 30 = "0", Pr. 70 is not displayed but the brake duty is fixed at 3%.
(Fixed at 2% for 5.5K, 7.5K)
3. The brake resistor cannot be connected to 0.1K and 0.2K inverters.
WARNING
The value set in Pr. 70 should not exceed the value set to the brake
resistor used.
Otherwise, the resistor can overheat.
100
PARAMETERS
4.2.14 Frequency jump (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36)
Pr. 31 "frequency jump 1A"
Pr. 32 "frequency jump 1B"
• When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a

mechanical system, these parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped. Up
to three areas may be set, with the jump frequencies set to either the top or bottom
point of each area.
• The value set to 1A, 2A or 3A is a jump point and operation is performed at this
frequency.
Parameter Factory
Setting Range Remarks
Number Setting
31 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 9999: Function invalid
Running frequency (Hz)
Frequency jump
Pr.36
Pr.35 4
Pr.34
Pr.33
Pr.32
Pr.31
<Setting>
• To fix the frequency at 30Hz between Pr. 33 and Pr. Pr.34:35Hz
34 (30Hz and 35Hz), set 35Hz in Pr. 34 and 30Hz in Pr.33:30Hz
Pr. 33.
• To jump to 35Hz between 30 and 35Hz, set 35Hz in Pr.33:35Hz
Pr. 33 and 30Hz in Pr. 34. Pr.34:30Hz
Note: During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within the set area is
valid.
101
PARAMETERS
4.2.15 Speed display (Pr. 37)
Pr. 37 "speed display"
Related parameter
Pr. 52 "operation panel/PU main
display data selection"
The unit of the output frequency display of the operation panel and PU (FR-PU04) can
be changed from the frequency to the motor speed or machine speed.

Remarks
0, 0.01 to 0: Output
37 0
9998 frequency
<Setting>
• To display the machine speed, set in Pr. 37 the machine speed for 60Hz operation.
Note: 1. The motor speed is converted into the output frequency and does not match
the actual speed.
2. To change the operation panel monitor (PU main display), refer to Pr. 52.
3. As the operation panel display is 4 digits, "----" is displayed when the
monitored value exceeds "9999".
4. Only the PU monitor display uses the unit set in this parameter. Set the
other speed-related parameters (e.g. Pr. 1) in the frequency unit.
5. Due to the restrictions of the resolution of the set frequency, the displayed
value may be different from the setting for the second decimal place.
CAUTION
Make sure that the running speed setting is correct.
Otherwise, the motor might run at extremely high speed, damaging the
machine.
102
PARAMETERS
4.2.16 Frequency at 5V (10V) input (Pr. 38)
Pr. 38 "frequency at 5V (10V) input" Related parameters
Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection"
Pr. 902 "frequency setting voltage bias"
Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain"
• You can set the frequency

provided when the frequency fm1 Pr.38

Output frequency
setting signal from the range
potentiometer connected
fm2
across terminals 2-5
(frequency setting
potentiometer) is 5VDC (or
Frequency setting signal 5V (10V)
10VDC).
Parameter Factory
Setting Range
Number Setting
38 60Hz 1 to 400Hz
Note: For the frequency setting of the built-in frequency setting potentiometer, refer to
Pr. 922 and Pr. 923. (Page 172)
4.2.17 Frequency at 20mA input (Pr. 39)

Pr. 39 "frequency at 20mA Related parameters
input" Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr. 904 "frequency setting current bias"
Pr. 905 "frequency setting current gain" 4
fm1 Pr.39
• You can set the frequency Output frequency
range
provided when the frequency
setting signal input across fm2
terminals 4-5 is 20mA.
Frequency setting signal 20mA
Parameter Factory
Setting Range
Number Setting
39 60Hz 1 to 400Hz
103
PARAMETERS
4.2.18 Up-to-frequency sensitivity (Pr. 41)
Pr. 41 "up-to-frequency sensitivity" Related parameters
Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal function
selection)
The ON range of the up-to-frequency signal (SU) output when the output frequency
reaches the running frequency can be adjusted between 0 and ±100% of the running
frequency.
This parameter can be used to ensure that the running frequency has been reached or
used as the operation start signal etc. for related equipment.

Running frequency
41 10% 0 to 100% Adjustable range Pr.41
Time
Output signal
SU OFF ON OFF
• Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 to allocate the terminal used for SU signal output.
Refer to page 163 for Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection).
Note: When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, the other
functions may be affected. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals
before making settings.
4.2.19 Output frequency detection (Pr. 42, Pr. 43)

Pr. 42 "output frequency detection"
Related parameters
Pr. 43 "output frequency detection Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal function
for reverse rotation" selection)
The output frequency detection signal (FU) is output when the output frequency reaches
or exceeds the setting. This function can be used for electromagnetic brake operation,
open signal etc.
• You can also set the detection of the frequency used exclusively for reverse rotation.
This function is effective for switching the timing of electromagnetic brake operation
between forward rotation (rise) and reverse rotation (fall) during vertical lift operation
etc.
Parameter Factory
Number Setting
42 6Hz 0 to 400Hz
43 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 9999: Same as Pr. 42 setting
104
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
Refer to the figure below and set the corresponding parameters:
• When Pr. 43 ≠ 9999, the Pr. 42 setting applies to forward rotation and the Pr. 43
setting applies to reverse rotation.
• Assign the terminal used for FU signal output with any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output
Refer to page 163 for Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection).
frequency (Hz)
Pr.42
Output
Forward
rotation Reverse Time
rotation
Pr.43
Output signal ON ON
FU OFF OFF OFF
Note: Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 may affect the other
functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Pr. 44, Pr. 45 ÎRefer to Pr. 7.

Pr. 46 ÎRefer to Pr. 0.
4.2.20 Monitor display (Pr. 52, Pr. 54)
Pr. 52 "operation panel/PU main display Related parameters

data selection" Pr. 37 "speed display"
Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring
Pr. 54 "FM terminal function selection" reference" 4
Pr. 56 "current monitoring
reference"
Pr. 171 "actual operation hour
meter clear"
Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration"
You can select the signals shown on the operation panel/parameter unit (FR-PU04)
main display screen and the signal output to the FM terminal.
•There is a pulse train output terminal FM. Select the signal using Pr. 54.
Parameter
Factory Setting Setting Range
Number
52 0 0, 23, 100
54 0 0, 1, 2
105
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
Set Pr. 52 and Pr. 54 in accordance with the following table:
Parameter Setting
Pr. 52 Pr. 54 Full-Scale Value of
Signal Type Unit
Operation PU main FM FM Level Meter
panel LED monitor terminal
Output
Hz 0/100 0/100 0 Pr. 55
frequency
Output
A 0/100 0/100 1 Pr. 56
current
Output
 0/100 0/100 2 400V or 800V
voltage
Alarm
 0/100 0/100 × 
display
Actual
operation 10h 23 23 × 
time
When 100 is set in Pr. 52, the monitored values during stop and during operation differ
as indicated below: (LED of Hz flickers during stop and is lit during operation.)
Pr. 52
0 100
During operation/
During stop During operation
during stop
Output frequency Output frequency Set frequency Output frequency
Output current Output current
Output voltage Output voltage
Alarm display Alarm display
Note: 1. During an error, the output frequency at error occurrence is displayed.
2. During MRS, the values are the same as during a stop.
During offline auto tuning, the tuning status monitor has priority.
Note: 1. The monitoring of items marked × cannot be selected.
2. By setting "0" in Pr. 52, the monitoring of "output frequency to alarm display"
can be selected in sequence by the SET key.
3. Running speed on the PU main monitor is selected by "other monitor
selection" of the parameter unit (FR-PU04).
4. The actual operation time displayed by setting "23" in Pr. 52 is calculated
using the inverter operation time. (Inverter stop time is not included.) Set "0"
in Pr. 171 to clear it.
5. The actual operation time is calculated from 0 to 99990 hours, then cleared,
and recalculated from 0. If the operation time is less than 10 hours there is
no display.
6. The actual operation time is not calculated if the inverter has not operated
for more than 1 hour continuously.
7. When the operation panel is used, the display unit is Hz or A only.
106
PARAMETERS
4.2.21 Monitoring reference (Pr. 55, Pr. 56)
Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring reference" Related parameters
Pr. 56 "current monitoring reference" Pr. 54 "FM terminal function
selection"
Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration"
Set the frequency or current which is referenced when the output frequency or output
current is selected for the FM terminal.

55 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
Rated output
56 0 to 500A
current
1440pulses/s (terminal FM) 1440pulses/s (terminal FM)

Output or display
Output or display
Output frequency Pr.55 Output current Pr.56
<Setting>
Refer to the above diagrams and set the frequency monitoring reference value in
Pr. 55 and the current monitoring reference value in Pr. 56.
Pr. 55 is set when Pr. 54 = 0 and Pr. 56 is set when Pr. 54 = 1.
Set the Pr. 55 and Pr. 56 values so that the output pulse train output of terminal FM is
1440pulses/s.
4
Note: The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400pulses/s. If Pr. 55 is not
adjusted, the output of terminal FM will be filled to capacity. Therefore, adjust Pr. 55.
107
PARAMETERS
4.2.22 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
(Pr. 57, Pr. 58)
Pr. 57 "restart coasting time"

Pr. 58 "restart cushion time"
• You can restart the inverter without stopping the motor (with the motor coasting) when
power is restored after an instantaneous power failure.
Parameter Factory
Number Setting
57 9999 0 to 5 s, 9999 9999: No restart
58 1.0 s 0 to 60 s
<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameters:
Parameter
Setting Description
Number
0.1K to 1.5K 0.5 s coasting time
0 Generally use this setting.
2.2K to 7.5K 1.0 s coasting time
Waiting time for inverter-triggered restart after power is
57 restored from an instantaneous power failure. (Set this time
0.1 to 5 s
between 0.1s and 5s according to the inertia moment (J)
and torque of the load.)
9999 No restart
Normally the inverter may be run with the factory settings.
58 0 to 60 s These values are adjustable to the load (inertia moment,
torque).
Instantaneous power
failure (power failure) time
Power supply
(R, S, T)
STF(STR)
Motor speed
(r/min)
Inverter output *
frequency
(Hz)
Inverter output
voltage
(V)
Restart
Coasting time voltage
Pr. 57 setting cushion time
Pr. 58 setting
*The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.
108
PARAMETERS
Note: 1. Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure uses a reduced-voltage

starting system in which the output voltage is raised gradually with the
preset frequency unchanged, independently of the coasting speed of the
motor.
As in the FR-A024/044, a motor coasting speed detection system (speed
search system) is not used but the output frequency before an
instantaneous power failure is output. Therefore, if the instantaneous power
failure time is longer than 0.2s, the frequency before the instantaneous
power failure cannot be stored and the inverter will start at 0Hz.
2. The SU and FU signals are not output during restart but are output after the
restart cushion time has elapsed.
CAUTION
When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been
selected, the motor and machine will start suddenly (after the reset time
has elapsed) after occurrence of an instantaneous power failure.
Stay away from the motor and machine.
When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure, apply the supplied CAUTION seals in easily visible places.
STOP
When the start signal is turned off or the RESET key is pressed during the
cushion time for automatic restart after instantaneous power failure,
deceleration starts after the automatic restart cushion time set in Pr. 58
"cushion time for automatic restart after instantaneous power failure" has
elapsed.
109
PARAMETERS
4.2.23 Remote setting function selection (Pr. 59)
Pr. 59 "remote setting function selection" Related parameters
If the operator panel is located away from the Pr. 1 "maximum frequency"
control box, you can use contact signals to Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
perform continuous variable-speed operation, Pr. 8 "deceleration time"
without using analog signals. Pr. 18 "high-speed maximum
• By merely setting this parameter, you can use frequency"
the acceleration, deceleration and setting clear Pr. 44 "second acceleration/
functions of the motorized speed setter (FR-FK). deceleration time"
• When the remote function is used, the output Pr. 45 "second deceleration time"
frequency of the inverter can be compensated
for as follows:
External operation mode Frequency set by RH/RM operation plus built-in
frequency setting potentiometer or external analog
frequency command
PU operation mode Frequency set by RH/RM operation plus PU's digitally-set
frequency or built-in frequency setting potentiometer
Parameter Number Factory Setting Setting Range
59 0 0, 1, 2
frequency(Hz)
When Pr.59=1
(Note)
When Pr.59=2
Output
0Hz
ON
ON
Acceleration (RH) ON
Deceleration (RM) ON
Clear (RL) ON
Forward rotation (STF) ON ON ON ON
Power supply ON ON
Note: External operation frequency or PU operation frequency other than multi-speed

Operation
Pr. 59
Frequency setting storage function
Setting Remote setting function
(E2PROM)
0 No —
1 Yes Yes
2 Yes No
• Use Pr. 59 to select whether the remote setting function is used or not and whether
the frequency setting storage function* in the remote setting mode is used or not.
When "remote setting function - yes" is selected, the functions of signals RH, RM and
RL are changed to acceleration (RH), deceleration (RM) and clear (RL). Use Pr. 180
to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection) to set signals RH, RM and RL.
* Frequency setting storage function
The remote setting frequency (frequency set by RH, RM operation) is stored into
memory. When power is switched off once, then on again, operation is resumed at this
setting of the output frequency. (Pr. 59=1)
110
PARAMETERS
<Frequency setting storage condition>
• Frequency at the time when the start signal (STF or STR) has switched off
• The remotely-set frequency is stored every one minute after one minute has
elapsed since turn off (on) of both the RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration)
signals. (The frequency is written if the present frequency setting compared with the
past frequency setting every one minute is different.) (The state of the RL signal
dose not affect writing.)
Note: 1. The frequency can be varied by RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration)

between 0 and the maximum frequency (Pr. 1 or Pr. 18 setting).
2. When the acceleration or deceleration signal switches on, the set frequency
varies according to the slope set in Pr. 44 or Pr. 45. The output frequency
acceleration/deceleration times are as set in Pr. 7 and Pr. 8, respectively.
Therefore, the longer preset times are used to vary the actual output
frequency.
3. If the start signal (STF or STR) is off, turning on the acceleration (RH) or
deceleration (RM) signal varies the set frequency.
4. When switching the start signal from ON to OFF, or changing frequency by
the RH or RM signal frequently, set the frequency setting value storage
function (E2PROM) invalid (Pr.59="2").
If set invalid (Pr.59="1"), frequency is written to E2PROM frequently, this will
shorten the life of the E2PROM.
111
PARAMETERS
REMARKS
This function is invalid during jog operation and PID control operation.
Setting frequency is "0"
• Even when the remotely-set frequency is cleared by turning on the RL (clear)
signal after turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals, the inverter operates at
the remotely-set frequency stored in the last operation if power is reapplied
before one minute has elapsed since turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals
Remotely -set frequency
stored in the last operation
Within one minute
Output Remotely -set frequency
frequency stored in the last operation
(Hz)
OFF
Deceleration (RM)
ON
Clear (RL)
Forward rotation (STF) ON ON

Power supply ON ON
• When the remotely-set frequency is cleared by turning on the RL (clear) signal
after turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals, the inverter operates at the
frequency in the remotely-set frequency cleared state if power is reapplied after
one minute has elapsed since turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals.
Remotely -set frequency
1 minute
stored in the last operation
More than
one minute
Operation at a set
Output frequency of 0Hz
frequency
(Hz)
Deceleration (RM) OFF
ON
Clear (RL)
Forward rotation (STF) ON ON

Power supply ON ON
CAUTION
When selecting this function, re-set the maximum frequency according to
the machine.
112
PARAMETERS
4.2.24 Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode (Pr. 60 to Pr. 63)
Pr. 60 "shortest acceleration/deceleration mode"
Pr. 61 "reference current" Related parameters
Pr. 62 "reference current for acceleration" Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 63 "reference current for deceleration"
The inverter automatically sets the shortest time for acceleration/deceleration for
operation.
• If you do not set the acceleration and deceleration times and V/F pattern, you can run
the inverter as if appropriate values had been set in the corresponding parameters.
This operation mode is useful when you want to operate without fine parameter
setting.
Pr. 61 to Pr. 63 are valid only when Pr. 60 = "1, 2, 11,12".
When the shortest acceleration/deceleration mode is selected, the setting values of
Pr. 7 "acceleration time", Pr. 8 "deceleration time", Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation
level" are made invalid.
Parameter Factory
Number Setting
60 0 0, 1, 2, 11, 12
9999: Referenced from
61 9999 0 to 500A, 9999
rated inverter current.
62 9999 0 to 200%, 9999
63 9999 0 to 200%, 9999
<Setting>
Pr. 60 Operation Invalid
Setting Mode
Description
parameter
4
Ordinary
0 operation  
mode
Shortest Set to accelerate/decelerate the
1 Stall prevention
acceleration/ motor in the shortest time. operation level
deceleration The inverter makes acceleration/
11 150%
mode I deceleration in the shortest time Pr. 7, Pr. 8,
Shortest using its full capabilities. Pr. 22
2 Set "11" or "12" when using Stall prevention
acceleration/
brake resistance and the brake operation level
deceleration
12 unit. 180%
mode II
Note: When the shortest acceleration/deceleration mode is selected, regenerative

over voltage (E.OV3) may occur if the regenerative brake does not have
enough capability at deceleration..
113
PARAMETERS
• Set the parameters when it is desired to improve the performance in the shortest
acceleration/deceleration mode.
(1) Pr. 61 "reference current"

Set the current value (A) that is referenced for stall prevention operation level.
Set this value when you want to use the motor rated current as reference such as
when capacities of the motor and inverter differ.
Setting Reference Current
9999 (factory setting) Referenced from rated inverter current
0 to 500A Referenced from setting (rated motor current)
(2) Pr. 62 "reference current for acceleration"

Set the stall prevention operation level (%) at acceleration.
Set when you want to restrict torque at acceleration, etc.
The value set in Pr.61 "reference current" becomes the reference value (100%).
9999 (factory setting) 150% (180%) is the limit value.
0 to 200% The setting of 0 to 200% is the limit value.
(3) Pr. 63 "reference current for deceleration"

Set the stall prevention operation level (%) at deceleration.
Set when you want to restrict torque at deceleration, etc.
The value set in Pr.61 "reference current" becomes the reference value (100%).
9999 (factory setting) 150% (180%) is the limit value.
0 to 200% The setting of 0 to 200% is the limit value.
114
PARAMETERS
4.2.25 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69)
Pr. 65 "retry selection"
Pr. 67 "number of retries at alarm occurrence"
Pr. 68 "retry waiting time"
Pr. 69 "retry count display erasure"
When any protective function (major fault) is activated and the inverter stops its output,
the inverter itself resets automatically and performs retries. You can select whether retry
is made or not, alarms reset for retry, number of retries made, and waiting time.
Parameter Factory
Setting Range
Number Setting
65 0 0 to 3
67 0 0 to 10, 101 to 110
68 1s 0.1 to 360 s
69 0 0
<Setting>
Use Pr. 65 to select the protective functions (major faults) which execute retry.
Errors Reset for
Setting
Retry
Display 0 1 2 3
E.OC1 z z z
E.OC2 z z z
E.OC3 z z z
E.OV1 z z z
E.OV2 z z z
E.OV3 z z z
E.THM z
E.THT z
E.FIN
E. BE z 4
E. GF z
E. LF
E.OHT z
E.OLT z
E.OPT z
E. PE z
E.PUE
E.RET
E.CPU
E.P24
E. 3
E. 6
E. 7
Note: z indicates the retry items selected.
115
PARAMETERS
Use Pr. 67 to set the number of retries at alarm occurrence.
Pr. 67 Setting Number of Retries Alarm Signal Output
0 Retry is not made. 
1 to 10 1 to 10 times Not output.
101 to 110 1 to 10 times Output.
• Use Pr. 68 to set the waiting time from when an inverter alarm occurs until a restart in
the range 0.1 to 360s.
• Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative number of successful restart times
made by retry. The setting of "0" erases the cumulative number of times.
Note: 1. The cumulative number in Pr. 69 is incremented by "1" when retry operation
is regarded as successful, i.e. when normal operation is continued without
the protective function (major fault) activated during a period five times
longer than the time set in Pr. 68.
2. If the protective function (major fault) is activated consecutively within a
period five times longer than the above waiting time, the operation panel
may show data different from the most recent data or the parameter unit
(FR-PU04) may show data different from the first retry data. The data stored
as the error reset for retry is only that of the protective function (major fault)
which was activated the first time.
3. When an inverter alarm is reset by the retry function at the retry time, the
stored data of the electronic thermal relay function, etc. are not cleared.
(Different from the power-on reset.)
CAUTION
When you have selected the retry function, stay away from the motor and
machine unless required. They will start suddenly (after the reset time has
elapsed) after occurrence of an alarm.
When you have selected the retry function, apply the supplied CAUTION
stickers easily visible places.
116
PARAMETERS
4.2.26 Applied motor (Pr. 71)
Pr. 71 "applied motor" Related parameters

Pr. 0 "torque boost"
Set the motor used. Pr. 12 "DC injection brake voltage"
• When using the Mitsubishi constant- Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage"
torque motor, set "1" in Pr. 71 for either Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
V/F control or general-purpose
magnetic flux vector control. Pr. 96 "auto-tuning setting/status"
The electronic thermal relay function is
set to the thermal characteristic of the constant-torque motor.
• When you selected the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, the values of the following
parameters are automatically changed. (only for the factory setting value)
Pr. 0 "torque boost", Pr. 12 "DC injection brake voltage"
Parameter Factory
Setting Range
Number Setting
0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 13, 15, 16, 23, 100, 101, 103,
71 0
105, 106, 113, 115, 116, 123
<Setting>
• Refer to the following list and set this parameter according to the motor used.
Applied motor
Pr. 71 Thermal Characteristics of Electronic
Setting Thermal Relay Function Constant-
Standard
Torque
0, 100 Thermal characteristics of a standard motor {
Thermal characteristics of a Mitsubishi constant-torque
1, 101 {
motor
3, 103 Standard motor {
13, 113 Constant-torque motor {
Select "offline auto tuning
Mitsubishi general- setting".
23, 123 purpose motor SF-JR4P {
(1.5kW or less)
5, 105 Standard motor Star {
4
Motor
15, 115 Constant-torque motor connection constants can {
6, 106 Standard motor Delta be entered {
16, 116 Constant-torque motor connection directly. {
By setting any of "100 to 123", thermal characteristic of electronic thermal relay function
(applied motor) can be changed as indicated below according to the ON/OFF status of
the RT signal:
RT Signal Thermal Characteristic of Electronic Thermal Relay Function (Applied Motor)
OFF As indicated in the above table
ON Constant-torque motor
CAUTION
Set this parameter correctly according to the motor used.
Incorrect setting may cause the motor to overheat and burn.
117
PARAMETERS
4.2.27 PWM carrier frequency and long wiring mode (Pr. 72, Pr. 240)
Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection"
Pr. 240 "Soft-PWM setting"
You can change the motor tone.
The long wiring mode can be set for the 400V class.
• By parameter setting, you can select Soft-PWM control which changes the motor
tone.
• Soft-PWM control changes motor noise from a metallic tone into an unoffending
complex tone.
• Surge voltage is suppressed regardless of wiring length in the long wiring mode.
(When operating a 400V motor with wiring length of 40m or longer, select long wiring
mode.)
Parameter
Number
0: 0.7kHz,
72 1 0 to 15
15: 14.5kHz
240 1 0, 1, 10, 11 (*) —
*The setting values "10, 11" can be set for the 400V class only.
<Setting>
• Refer to the following list and set the parameters:
Pr. 72 Setting Setting Description
PWM carrier frequency can be changed.
72 0 to 15 The setting displayed is in [kHz].
Note that 0 indicates 0.7kHz and 15 indicates 14.5kHz.
Note: 1. Note that when the inverter is run at the ambient temperature above 40°C
with a 2kHz or higher value set in Pr. 72, the rated output current of the
inverter must be reduced. (Refer to page 214.)
2. An increased PWM frequency will decrease the motor sound but increase
noise and leakage currents. Therefore, perform the reduction techniques
(Refer to pages 42 to 46).
118
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
Description
Pr. 240 Setting
Soft-PWM Long wiring mode Remarks
0 invalid invalid —
valid
1 invalid —
(when Pr. 72="0 to 5")
10 (Note) invalid valid Setting can be made
only for the 400V
11 (Note) valid valid class
Note: Note the following when Pr. 240="10 or 11"

1. When Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" = "2 or more", PWM carrier
frequency is 1kHz.
2. Output voltage at the rated frequency decreases by 4V maximum.
3. If you copied parameters to the previous version inverter (Pr. 240="10 or 11"
is not available), set Pr. 240 again.
4. For the 400V class, use an insulation-enhanced motor. (Using other motors
may result in insulation deterioration of motors due to surge voltage
independently of the Pr. 240 setting.)
5. Values exceeding 120Hz can not be written to Pr. 1 (Pr. 18) when Pr.
240="10 or 11". Similarly, "10 or 11" can not be written to Pr. 240 when the
value set in Pr. 1 (Pr. 18) exceeds 120Hz.
119
PARAMETERS
4.2.28 Voltage input (Pr. 73)
Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection" Related parameters
Pr. 38 "frequency at 5V (10V) input"
• You can change the input (terminal 2) specifications in response to the frequency
setting voltage signal. When entering 0 to 10VDC, always make this setting.
73 0 0, 1
Setting Terminal 2 Input Voltage

0 For 0 to 5VDC input (factory setting)
1 For 0 to 10VDC input
Note: 1. To change the maximum output frequency at the input of the maximum
frequency command voltage, use Pr. 38. Also, the acceleration/deceleration
time, which is a slope up/down to the acceleration/deceleration reference
frequency, is not affected by the change in Pr. 73 setting.
2. When connecting a frequency setting potentiometer across terminals 10-2-5
for operation, always set "0" in this parameter.
4.2.29 Input filter time constant (Pr. 74)

Pr. 74 "filter time constant"
You can set the input section's internal filter constant for an external voltage or current
frequency setting signal.
• Effective for eliminating noise in the frequency setting circuit.

• Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be performed due to noise.
A larger setting results in slower response. (The time constant can be set between
approximately 1ms to 1s with the setting of 0 to 8. A larger setting results in a larger
filter time constant.)
74 1 0 to 8
120
PARAMETERS
4.2.30 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop
selection (Pr. 75)
Pr. 75 "reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection"
You can select the reset input acceptance, operation panel or PU (FR-PU04) connector
disconnection detection function and PU stop function.
• Reset selection : You can select the reset function input timing.
• PU disconnection detection: When it is detected that the operation panel/PU (FR-
PU04) is disconnected from the inverter for more than
1s, the inverter outputs an alarm code (E.PUE) and
comes to an alarm stop.
• PU stop selection : When an alarm occurs in any operation mode, you can
STOP
stop the inverter from the PU by pressing the RESET key.
Parameter Factory
Setting Range
Number Setting
75 14 0 to 3, 14 to 17
<Setting>
Pr. 75 PU Disconnection PU Stop
Reset Selection
Setting Detection Selection
0 Reset input normally enabled.
If the PU is disconnected, Pressing the
Reset input enabled only when the operation will be continued.
1 STOP
key
protective function is activated. RESET
decelerates the
2 Reset input normally enabled. When the PU is inverter to a stop
disconnected, an error is
Reset input enabled only when the displayed on the PU and the only in the PU
3 operation mode.
protective function is activated. inverter output is shut off.
14 Reset input normally enabled. Pressing the
4
If the PU is disconnected, STOP
Reset input enabled only when the operation will be continued. RESETkey
15
protective function is activated. decelerates the
16 Reset input normally enabled. inverter to a stop
When the PU is in any of the PU,
disconnected, an error is external and
Reset input enabled only when the displayed on the PU and the communication
17
protective function is activated. inverter output is shut off. operation
modes.
121
PARAMETERS
STOP
How to make a restart after a stop by the RESET key on the PU
(1) Operation panel
1) After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch off the STF or STR signal.
2) Press the MODE key two times* to display .
Note: When Pr. 79 = 3, press the MODE key three times, to display .
Then, press the key and proceed to step 3).
(For the monitor screen) ......Refer to page 62 for the monitor display provided by
pressing the MODE key.
3) Press the SET key.
4) Switch on the STF or STR signal.
(2) Parameter unit (FR-PU04)
1) After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch off the STF or STR signal.
3) Switch on the STF or STR signal.
Speed
Time
SET key
Operation panel
STOP
STF ON RESET key
(STR) OFF
Stop and restart example for external operation

The other way of making a restart other than the above method is to perform a power-
reset or to make a reset with the inverter reset terminal.
Note:1. By entering the reset signal (RES) during operation, the inverter shuts off
output while it is reset, the data of the electronic thermal relay function and
regenerative brake duty are reset, and the motor coasts.
2. The PU disconnection detection function judges that the PU is disconnected
when it is removed from the inverter for more than 1s. If the PU had been
disconnected before power-on, it is not judged as an alarm.
3. To resume operation, reset the inverter after confirming that the PU is
connected securely.
4. The Pr. 75 value can be set any time. Also, if parameter (all) clear is
executed, this setting will not return to the initial value.
5. When the inverter is stopped by the PU stop function, PS is displayed but an
alarm is not output.
When the PU connector is used for RS-485 communication operation, the
reset selection and PU stop selection functions are valid but the PU
disconnection detection function is invalid.
CAUTION
Do not reset the inverter with the start signal on.
Otherwise, the motor will start instantly after resetting, leading to
potentially hazardous conditions.
122
PARAMETERS
4.2.31 Parameter write disable selection (Pr. 77)
Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection" Related parameters
You can select between write-enable and disable for parameters. This function is used
to prevent parameter values from being rewritten by incorrect operation.
77 0 0, 1, 2
<Setting>
Pr. 77
Function
Setting
Parameter values may only be written during a stop in the
0
PU operation mode. (Note 1)
Write disabled. (Note 2)
1 Values of Pr. 22, Pr. 75, Pr. 77 and Pr. 79 "operation
mode selection" can be written.
Write enabled even during operation. (Note 3)
2
Setting is enabled independently of the operation mode.
Note: 1. The shaded parameters in the parameter list (page 76) can be set at any
time.
2. By setting "1" in Pr. 77, the following clear operations can be inhibited:
• Parameter clear
• Parameter all clear
3. If Pr. 77 = 2, the values of Pr. 23, Pr. 66, Pr. 71, Pr. 79, Pr. 80, Pr. 83, Pr. 84,
Pr. 96, Pr. 180 to Pr.183 and Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 cannot be written during 4
operation. Stop operation when changing their parameter settings.
123
PARAMETERS
4.2.32 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78)
Pr. 78 "reverse rotation prevention Related parameters
selection"
This function can prevent any reverse rotation fault resulting from the incorrect input of
the start signal.
• Used for a machine which runs only in one direction, e.g. fan, pump.
(The setting of this function is valid for the combined, PU, external and
communication operations.)
78 0 0, 1, 2
<Setting>
Pr. 78 Setting Function
0 Both forward and reverse rotations allowed
1 Reverse rotation disallowed
2 Forward rotation disallowed
4.2.33 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)

Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" Related parameters
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Used to select the operation mode of the inverter. Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
The inverter can be run from the operation panel or (multi-speed operation)
parameter unit (PU operation), with external Pr. 75 "reset selection/disconnected
signals (external operation), or by combination of PU detection/PU stop selection"
PU operation and external operation (external/PU Pr. 146 "frequency setting command
selection"
combined operation). Pr. 180 to Pr. 183
When power is switched on (factory setting), the (input terminal function selection)
PU operation mode is selected.
79 1 0 to 4, 6 to 8
124
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
In the following table, operation using the operation panel or parameter unit is
abbreviated to PU operation.
Pr. 79
Function
Setting
When power is switched on, the external operation mode is selected.
0 PU or external operation can be selected by pressing the keys of the operation panel or
parameter unit. (Refer to page 60) For these modes, refer to the setting 1 and 2 below.
Operation mode Running frequency Start signal
Digital setting using the built-in RUN ( FWD , REV ) key of
1 PU operation frequency setting potentiometer or
mode (*) by the key operation of the operation panel or FWD or
operation panel or parameter unit REV key of parameter unit
External signal input (across

External External signal input
2 terminals 2 (4)-5, multi-speed
operation mode (terminal STF, STR)
selection)
Digital setting using the built-in
External/PU
frequency setting potentiometer or by
combined External signal input
3 the key operation of the operation
operation mode 1 (terminal STF, STR)
panel or parameter unit, or external
(*)
signal input (multi-speed setting only)
External/PU External signal input (across RUN ( FWD
, REV ) key of
4 combined terminals 2 (4)-5, multi-speed operation panel or FWD or
operation mode 2 selection) REV key of parameter unit
Switch-over mode
6
Switch-over between PU and external operation modes can be done while running.
External operation mode (PU operation interlock)
MRS signal ON ......... Able to be switched to PU operation mode (output stop
7
during external operation)
MRS signal OFF ........ Switching to PU operation mode inhibited
Switching to other than external operation mode (disallowed during operation)
8 X16 signal ON ........... Switched to external operation mode
X16 signal OFF.......... Switched to PU operation mode 4
* Use Pr. 146 "frequency setting command selection" to select whether operation is to
be performed with the built-in frequency setting potentiometer or / key.
Note: 1. Either "3" or "4" may be set to select the PU/external combined operation.
These settings differ in starting method.
STOP
2. The stop function (PU stop selection) activated by pressing RESET of the PU
(operation panel/FR-PU04) is valid even in other than the PU operation mode
when shipped from the factory. (Refer to page 121.)
125
PARAMETERS
(1) Switch-over mode
During operation, you can change the current operation mode to another operation
mode.
Operation Mode
Switching Control/Operating Status
Switching
External operation to PU 1) Operate the operation panel keys to select the PU operation
operation mode.
• Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation.
• Set frequency is the same as the external frequency
setting signal value. (Note that the setting will disappear
when power is switched off or the inverter is reset.)
PU operation to external 1) Operate the operation panel keys to select the external
operation operation mode.
• Rotation direction is determined by the external operation
input signal.
• Set frequency is determined by the external frequency
setting signal.
Note: When the switch-over mode is selected, the operation panel's potentiometer
setting is made invalid even if the Pr. 146 "built-in potentiometer switching" setting
is 0 or 9999.
(2) PU operation interlock

PU operation interlock forces the operation mode to be changed to the external
operation mode when the MRS signal switches off. This function prevents the inverter
from being inoperative by the external command if the mode is accidentally left
unswitched from the PU operation mode.
1)Preparation
• Set "7" in Pr. 79 (PU operation interlock).
• Set the terminal used for MRS signal input with any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input
functions may be affected.
Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.
2)Function
MRS Signal Function/Operation
Output stopped during external operation.
Operation mode can be switched to PU operation mode.
ON
Parameter values can be rewritten in PU operation mode.
PU operation allowed.
Forcibly switched to external operation mode.
OFF External operation allowed.
Switching to PU operation mode inhibited.
126
PARAMETERS
<Function/operation changed by switching on-off the MRS signal>
Operating Switching to
Condition MRS Operation Parameter PU
Mode Operating Status
Operation Signal (Note 4) Write Operation
mode Status Mode
During ON → OFF Enabled →
During stop Disabled
stop (Note 3) disabled
If external operation
PU External frequency setting and
During ON → OFF Enabled →
start signal are entered, Disabled
operation (Note 3) disabled
operation is performed
in that status.
Disabled →
OFF → ON Enabled
During disabled
During stop
stop Disabled →
ON → OFF Disabled
disabled
External External
During operation → Disabled →
OFF → ON Disabled
During output stop disabled
operation Output stop → Disabled →
ON → OFF Disabled
operation disabled
Note: 1. If the MRS signal is on, the operation mode cannot be switched to the PU
operation mode when the start signal (STF, STR) is on.
2. The operation mode switches to the external operation mode independently
of whether the start signal (STF, STR) is on or off.
Therefore, the motor is run in the external operation mode when the MRS
signal is switched off with either of STF and STR on.
3. When the protective function (major fault) is activated, the inverter can be
STOP
reset by pressing the RESET key of the operation panel.
4. Switching the MRS signal on and rewriting the Pr. 79 value to other than "7"
in the PU operation mode causes the MRS signal to provide the ordinary
MRS function (output stop). Also as soon as "7" is set in Pr. 79, the operation
mode is switched to PU operation mode.
(3) Operation mode switching by external signal

1) Preparation 4
Set "8" (switching to other than external operation mode) in Pr. 79.
Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection) to set the terminal
used for X16 signal input.
functions may be affected.
Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.
2) Function
This switching is enabled during an inverter stop only and cannot be achieved
during operation.
X16 Signal Operation Mode
ON External operation mode (cannot be changed to the PU operation mode)
OFF PU operation mode (cannot be changed to the external operation mode)
127
PARAMETERS
4.2.34 General-purpose magnetic flux vector control selection (Pr. 80)
Pr. 80 "motor capacity" Related parameters
Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage"
Pr. 84 "rated motor frequency"
Pr. 96 "auto-tuning setting/status"
You can set the general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.

z General-purpose magnetic flux vector control
Provides large starting torque and sufficient low-speed torque.
If the motor constants vary slightly, stable, large low-speed torque is provided without
specific motor constant setting or tuning.
Parameter Factory
Number Setting
0.1kW to 7.5kW,
80 9999 9999: V/F control
9999 (Note)
Note: The setting range changes with the inverter: 0.2kW to 7.5kW, 9999 for the 400V
class.
If any of the following conditions are not satisfied, faults such as torque shortage and
speed fluctuation may occur. In this case, select V/F control.
<Operating conditions>
• The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity.
• The number of motor poles is any of 2, 4, and 6. (4 poles only for the constant-torque
motor)
• Single-motor operation (one motor for one inverter) is performed.
• The wiring length between the inverter and motor is within 30m. (If the length is over
30m, perform offline auto tuning with the cables wired.)
<Setting>
(1) General-purpose magnetic flux vector control
• The general-purpose magnetic flux vector control can be selected by setting the
capacity of the motor used in Pr. 80.
Parameter
Setting Description
Number
9999 V/F control
80 0.1 to 7.5/ General-purpose magnetic
Set the motor capacity applied.
0.2 to 7.5 (Note) flux vector control
Note: The setting range changes with the inverter: 0.2kW to 7.5kW, 9999 for the 400V class.
• When using Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA), set "1" in Pr. 71. (When
using the SF-HRCA, perform the offline auto tuning.)
128
PARAMETERS
4.2.35 Offline auto tuning function (Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96)
Pr. 82 "motor excitation current" Related parameters
Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage" Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay "
Pr. 84 "rated motor frequency" Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Pr. 90 "motor constant (R1)"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 96 "auto-tuning setting/status"
What is auto tuning?

(1) The general-purpose magnetic flux vector control system gets the best
performance from the motor for operation.
(2) Using the offline auto tuning function to improve the operational performance of
the motor.
When you use the general-purpose magnetic flux vector control, you can perform the
offline auto tuning operation to calculate the motor constants automatically.
z Offline auto tuning is made valid only when Pr. 80 is set to other than "9999" to select
the general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
z The Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR0.4kW or more) or Mitsubishi constant-torque
motor (SF-JRCA 200V class and 4-pole motor of 0.4kW to 7.5kW) allows general-
purpose magnetic flux vector control operation to be performed without using the
offline auto tuning function. However, if any other motor (Motor made of the other
manufacturers or SF-JRC, etc.) is used or the wiring distance is long, using the offline
auto tuning function allows the motor to be operated with the optimum operational
characteristics.
z Offline auto tuning
Automatically measures the motor constants used for general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control.
• Offline auto tuning can be performed with the load connected. 4
• The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the operation panel or PU
(FR-PU04).
• Offline auto tuning is available only when the motor is at a stop.
z Tuning data (motor constants) can be copied to another inverter with the PU (FR-PU04).
• You can read, write and copy the motor constants tuned by the offline auto tuning.
Parameter Factory
Number Setting
82 9999 0 to 500A, 9999 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor
83 200V/400V 0 to 1000V Rated inverter voltage
84 60Hz 50 to 120Hz
90 9999 0 to 50Ω, 9999 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor
96 0 0, 1 0: No tuning
129
PARAMETERS
<Operating conditions>
• The motor is connected.
• The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity.
• Special motors such as high-slip motors and high-speed motors cannot be tuned.
• The motor may move slightly. Therefore, fix the motor securely with a mechanical
brake, or before tuning, make sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor
runs.
*This instruction must be followed especially for vertical lift applications.
If the motor runs slightly, tuning performance is unaffected.
• Offline auto tuning will not be performed properly if it is started when a reactor or
surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) is connected between the inverter and
motor. Remove it before starting tuning.
<Setting>
(1) Parameter setting
• Set the motor capacity (kW) in Pr. 80 and select the general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control.
• Refer to the parameter details list and set the following parameters:
1) Set "1" in Pr. 96.
2) Set the rated motor current (A) in Pr. 9.
3) Set the rated motor voltage (V) in Pr. 83.
4) Set the rated motor frequency (Hz) in Pr. 84.
5) Select the motor using Pr. 71.
• Standard motor .....................................................................Pr. 71 = "3" or "103"
• Constant-torque motor ..........................................................Pr. 71 = "13" or "113"
• Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR 4 poles (1.5kW or less)........... Pr. 71 = "23" or "123"
Note: Pr. 83 and Pr. 84 are only displayed when the general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control is selected.
In these parameters, set the values given on the motor plate. Set 200V/60Hz or
400V/60Hz if the standard or other motor has more than one rated value.
After tuning is over, set the Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay" value to the rated
current at the operating voltage/frequency.
130
PARAMETERS
Parameter details
Parameter
Setting Description
Number
9 0 to 500A Set the rated motor current (A).
0, 100 Thermal characteristics suitable for standard motor
Thermal characteristics suitable for Mitsubishi's constant-
1, 101
torque motor
3, 103 Standard motor
Select "offline
13, 113 Constant-torque motor
auto tuning
71 (Note) Mitsubishi's SF-JR4P standard motor setting"
23, 123
(1.5kW or less)
5, 105 Standard motor Star
15, 115 Constant-torque motor connection Direct input of
motor constants
6, 106 Standard motor Delta enabled
16, 116 Constant-torque motor connection
83 0 to 1000V Set the rated motor voltage (V).
84 50 to 120Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
0 to 50Ω, Tuning data
90
9999 (Values measured by offline auto tuning are set automatically.)
0 Offline auto tuning is not performed.
96
1 Offline auto tuning is performed.
Note: The electronic thermal relay function characteristics are also selected
simultaneously. By setting any of "100 to 123", the electronic thermal relay
function changes to the thermal characteristic of the constant-torque motor
when the RT signal switches on.
(2) Tuning execution

• For PU operation or combined operation 2, press the FWD or REV key.
• For external operation or combined operation 1, switch on the run command.
4
Note: 1. To force tuning to end
STOP
• Switch on the MRS or RES signal or press the RESET key to end.
• Switch off the tuning start command to make a forced end.
2. During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid:
• Input signals
<Valid signals>
MRS, RES, STF, STR
• Output signals
RUN, FM, A, B, C
3. Special caution should be exercised when a sequence has been designed to
open the mechanical brake with the RUN signal.
131
PARAMETERS
(3) Monitoring the offline tuning status
When the parameter unit (FR-PU04) is used, the Pr. 96 value is displayed during tuning
on the main monitor as shown below. When the operation panel is used, the same value
as on the PU is only displayed:
• Operation panel display

(For inverter trip)
2. Tuning in 4. Error-
1. Setting 3. Completion
progress activated end
Displayed
1 2 3 9
value
• Parameter unit (FR-PU04) main monitor

(For inverter trip)
2. Tuning in 4. Error-
1. Setting 3. Completion
progress activated end
Display 1 2 TUNE 3 TUNE

ERROR 9
TUNE
COMPLETION
STOP PU STF FWD PU STF STOP PU STF STOP PU
• Reference: Offline auto tuning time (factory setting) is about 10s.
(4) Ending the offline auto tuning

1) Confirm the Pr. 96 value.
• Normal end: "3" is displayed.
• Abnormal end: "9", "91", "92" or "93" is displayed.
• Forced end: "8" is displayed.
2) When tuning ended normally

STOP
For PU operation or combined operation 2, press the RESET key. For external
operation or combined operation 1, switch off the start signal (STF or STR) once.
This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to
the ordinary indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be done.)
Do not change the Pr.96 setting after completion of tuning (3). If the Pr.96 setting is
changed, tuning data is made invalid. If the Pr.96 setting is changed, tuning must be
performed again.
3) When tuning was ended due to an error

Offline auto tuning did not end normally. (The motor constants have not been set.)
Reset the inverter and start tuning all over again.
132
PARAMETERS
4) Error display definitions
Error Display Error Cause Remedy

9 Inverter trip Make setting again.
Increase
Current limit (stall prevention) function was
91 acceleration/deceleration time.
activated.
Set "1" in Pr. 156.
Converter output voltage reached 75% of Check for fluctuation of power
92
rated value. supply voltage.
Check the motor wiring and
93 Calculation error
make setting again.
No connection with motor will result in a calculation (93) error.
5) When tuning was forced to end
STOP
An forced end occurs when you forced the tuning to end by pressing the RESET key
or switching off the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning.
In this case, the offline auto tuning has not ended normally.
(The motor constants are not set.)
Reset the inverter and restart the tuning.
Note: 1. The R1 motor constant measured during the offline auto tuning is stored as a
parameter and its data is held until the offline auto tuning is performed again.
2. An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning
error.
After power is restored, the inverter goes into the ordinary operation mode.
Therefore, when STF (STR) is on, the motor runs in forward (reverse)
rotation.
3. Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode. Note
that if an error retry has been set, retry is ignored.
4. The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0Hz.
4
CAUTION
When the offline auto tuning is used for an elevating machine, e.g. a lifter,
it may drop due to insufficient torque.
133
PARAMETERS
<Setting the motor constant as desired>
z To set the motor constant without using the offline auto tuning data
<Operating procedure>
1. Set any of the following values in Pr. 71:
Star Connection Delta Connection
Motor Motor
Standard motor 5 or 105 6 or 106
Setting
Constant-torque motor 15 or 115 16 or 116
By setting any of "105 to 116", the electronic thermal relay function changes to the
thermal characteristics of the constant-torque motor when the RT signal switches on.
2. Set "801" in Pr. 77.

(Only when the Pr. 80 setting is other than "9999", the parameter values of the
motor excitation current (Pr. 82) and motor constant (Pr. 90) can be displayed.
Though the parameters other than Pr. 82 and Pr. 90 can also be displayed, they
are parameters for manufacturer setting and their values should not be changed.)
3. In the parameter setting mode, read the following parameters and set desired
values:
Parameter Setting Factory
Name Setting Range
Motor excitation
82 0 to 500A, 9999 0.01A 9999
current
Motor constant
90 0 to 50Ω, 9999 0.001Ω 9999
(R1)
4. Return the Pr. 77 setting to the original value.
5. Refer to the following table and set Pr. 84:
Name Setting Range
Rated motor
84 50 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz
frequency
Note: 1. The Pr. 90 value may only be read when general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control has been selected.
2. Set "9999" in Pr. 90 to use the standard motor constant (including that for the
constant-torque motor).
3. If "star connection" is mistaken for "delta connection" or vice versa during
setting of Pr. 71, general-purpose magnetic flux vector control cannot be
exercised normally.
134
PARAMETERS
4.2.36 Computer link operation (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124, Pr. 342)
Pr. 117 "communication station number"
Related parameter
Pr. 118 "communication speed"
Pr. 146 "frequency setting
Pr. 119 "stop bit length" command selection"
Pr. 120 "parity check presence/absence"
Pr. 121 "number of communication retries"
Pr. 122 "communication check time interval"
Pr. 123 "waiting time setting"
Pr. 124 "CR • LF presence/absence selection"
Pr. 342 "E 2 PROM write selection"
Used to perform required settings for RS-485 communication between the inverter and
personal computer.
Using the inverter setup software (FR-SW-SETUP-WE (or -WJ for Japanese
version)), parameter setting, monitoring, etc. can be done efficiently.
z The motor can be run from the PU connector of the inverter using RS-485
communication.
Communication specifications
Conforming standard RS-485
Number of inverters connected 1:N (maximum 32 inverters)
Communication speed Selectable between 19200, 9600 and 4800bps
Control protocol Asynchronous
Communication method Half-duplex
Character system ASCII (7 bits/8 bits) selectable
Communication
specifications
Stop bit length Selectable between 1 bit and 2 bits.

Terminator CR/LF (presence/absence selectable)
Check Parity check Selectable between presence (even/odd) and absence
system Sum check Present
Waiting time setting Selectable between presence and absence
z For the instruction codes of the parameters, refer to Appendix 1 "Instruction
Code List" (page 228). 4
REMARKS
For computer link operation, set 65520 (HFFF0) as the value "8888" and 65535
(HFFFF) as the value "9999".
135
PARAMETERS

117 0 0 to 31
118 192 48, 96, 192
Data length 8 0, 1
119 1
Data length 7 10, 11
120 2 0, 1, 2
121 1 0 to 10, 9999
122* 0 0, 0.1 to 999.8 s, 9999
123 9999 0 to 150, 9999
124 1 0, 1, 2
342 0 0, 1
* When making communication, set any value other than 0 in Pr. 122 "communication
check time interval".
<Setting>
To make communication between the personal computer and inverter, the
communication specifications must be set to the inverter initially. If initial setting is not
made or there is a setting fault, data transfer cannot be made.
Note: After making the initial setting of the parameters, always reset the inverter. After
you have changed the communication-related parameters, communication
cannot be made until the inverter is reset.
Parameter
Description Setting Description
Number
Station number specified for communication from the
Communication PU connector.
117 0 to 31
station number Set the inverter station numbers when two or more
inverters are connected to one personal computer.
48 4800bps
Communication
118 96 9600bps
speed
192 19200bps
0 Stop bit length 1 bit
8 bits
1 Stop bit length 2 bits
119 Stop bit length
10 Stop bit length 1 bit
7 bits
11 Stop bit length 2 bits
Parity check 0 Absent
120 presence/ 1 Odd parity present
absence 2 Even parity present
Set the permissible number of retries at occurrence of
a data receive error.
0 to 10 If the number of consecutive errors exceeds the
permissible value, the inverter will come to an alarm
Number of stop.
121 communication If a communication error occurs, the inverter will not
retries come to an alarm stop. At this time, the inverter can be
9999 coasted to a stop by MRS or RES input.
(65535) During a communication error (H0 to H5), the minor fault
signal (LF) is switched on. Allocate the used terminal
with any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (multi-function outputs).
136
PARAMETERS
Parameter
Description Setting Description
Number
0 No communication
Communication Set the communication check time [seconds] interval.
0.1 to
122 check time If a no-communication state persists for longer than the
999.8
interval permissible time, the inverter will come to an alarm stop.
9999 Communication check suspension
Set the waiting time between data transmission to the
Waiting time 0 to 150
123 inverter and response.
setting
9999 Set with communication data.
CR • LF 0 Without CR/LF
instruction 1 With CR, without LF
124
presence/
2 With CR/LF
absence
When parameter write is performed from the
0
E2PROM write computer, parameters are written to E2PROM.
342*
selection When parameter write is performed from the
1
computer, parameters are written to RAM.
* When you have set write to RAM, powering off the inverter clears the parameter values that
have been changed. Therefore the parameter values available when power is switched on
again are those stored previously in E2PROM.
When the parameter values will be changed frequently, set "1" in Pr. 342 to choose write to
RAM. Performing frequent parameter write with "E2PROM write" set will shorten the life of the
E2PROM.
The Pr. 342 " E2PROM write selection" setting is also valid when the communication option is
fitted.
• Set "1" or "9999" in Pr. 146 "frequency setting command selection" .
REMARKS
When parameter is set to without E2PROM write (Pr.342="1"), performing power
reset or terminal reset returns the setting value to the original value (value stored in
E2PROM).
<Computer programming>
(1) Communication protocol 4
Data communication between the computer and inverter is performed using the
following procedure:
Data read
Computer
↓ (Data flow) *2
Inverter 1) 4) 5)
Time
Inverter 2) 3)
*1
↓ (Data flow)
Computer Data write
*1. If a data error is detected and a retry must be made, execute retry operation with the
user program. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive
retries exceeds the parameter setting.
*2. On receipt of a data error occurrence, the inverter returns "reply data 3)" to the
computer again. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive
data errors reaches or exceeds the parameter setting.
137
PARAMETERS
(2) Communication operation presence/absence and data format types
Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows:
Run Running Parameter Inverter Parameter
No. Operation Monitoring
Command Frequency Write Reset Read
Communication request is
A A
sent to the inverter in
1) A' (A") (A") A B B
accordance with the user
Note 1 Note 2
program in the computer.
Inverter data processing
2) Present Present Present Absent Present Present
time
Reply data No error* E,E' E
from the (Request C C C Absent (E") (E")
inverter accepted) Note 1 Note 2
3)
(Data 1) is With error
checked for (request D D D Absent F F
error. rejected)
Computer processing delay
4) Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent
time
Answer from No error*
computer in (No inverter Absent Absent Absent Absent G G
response to processing)
5) reply data 3). With error.
(Data 3) is (Inverter
checked for Absent Absent Absent Absent H H
outputs 3)
error) again)
* In the communication request data from the computer to the inverter, 10ms or more is
also required after "no data error (ACK)". (Refer to page 141.)
Note: 1. Setting any of "0.01 to 9998" in Pr. 37 "speed display" and "1" in instruction
code "HFF" changes the data format to A" or E" (400V class). Regardless of
the instruction code "HFF" setting, the data format for 200V or 100V class is
always A" or E". The output frequency is the value of the speed display and its
unit is 0.001r/min. If the instruction code FF is not 1, the unit is 1r/min and the
4-digit data format can be used.
2. The read/write data format of Pr. 37 "speed display" is always E"/A".
138
PARAMETERS
(3) Data format
Data used is hexadecimal.
Data is automatically transferred in ASCII between the computer and inverter.
• Data format types
1) Communication request data from computer to inverter
[Data write]
*2 Inverter *3
Format A *1 Instruction Sum
station Waiting Data *4
ENQ code check
number time
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ←Number of
characters
*2 Inverter *3
*1 Instruction Sum
Format A' station Waiting Data *4
ENQ code check
number time Number of
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ←characters
*2 Inverter *3
Format A'' *1 Instruction Sum
station Waiting Data *4
ENQ code check
number time
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ←Number of
[Data read] characters
*2 Inverter *3
*1 Instruction Sum
Format B station Waiting *4
ENQ code check
number time
Number of
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ←characters
2) Reply data from inverter to computer during data write

[No data error detected] [Data error detected]
*2 Inverter *2 Inverter
*1 *1 Error
Format C station *4 Format D station *4
ACK NAK code
number number
Number of Number of
1 2 3 4 ←characters 1 2 3 4 5 ←characters
3) Reply data from inverter to computer during data read

*2 Inverter
*1 *1 Sum
Format E station Read data *4
STX ETX check
number
Format F
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
*1 *2 Inverter Read *1 Sum *1 *2 Inverter Error
Format E' station *4 *4
STX data ETX check NAK station code
number number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ←Number of 1 2 3 4 5
characters
*2 Inverter
*1 *1 Sum
Format E'' station Read data *4
STX ETX check
number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4) Send data from computer to inverter during data read
(can be skipped) *2 Inverter *2 Inverter
*1 *1
Format G station *4 Format H station *4
ACK NAK
number number
Number of
1 2 3 4 ←Number of characters 1 2 3 4 ← characters
139
PARAMETERS
*1. Indicate a control code. (Refer to page 140.)
*2. The inverter station numbers may be set between H00 and H1F (stations 0 and 31)
in hexadecimal.
*3. When the Pr. 123 "waiting time setting" setting is other than "9999", create the
communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number
of characters is decremented by 1.)
*4. CR, LF code
When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, codes CR (carriage return)
and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers.
In this case, setting must also be made on the inverter according to the computer. Also,
the presence and absence of the CR and LF codes can be selected using Pr. 124.
(4) Data definitions
1)Control codes
Signal ASCII Code Description
STX H02 Start of Text (Start of data)
ETX H03 End of Text (End of data)
ENQ H05 Enquiry (Communication request)
ACK H06 Acknowledge (No data error detected)
LF H0A Line Feed
CR H0D Carriage Return
NAK H15 Negative Acknowledge (Data error detected)
2)Inverter station number
Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer.
3)Instruction code
Specify the processing request, e.g. operation, monitoring, given by the computer
to the inverter. Hence, the inverter can be run and monitored in various ways by
specifying the instruction code as appropriate. (Refer to page 228.)
4)Data
Indicates the data such as frequency and parameters transferred to and from the
inverter. The definitions and ranges of set data are determined in accordance with
the instruction codes. (Refer to page 228.)
5)Waiting time
Specify the waiting time between the receipt of data at the inverter from the
computer and the transmission of reply data. Set the waiting time in accordance
with the response time of the computer between 0 and 150ms in 10ms increments
(e.g. 1 = 10ms, 2 = 20ms).
Computer
Inverter data processing time
↓
= waiting time + data check time
Inverter
(setting×10ms) (12ms)
Inverter
↓
Computer
Note: When the Pr. 123 "waiting time setting" setting is other than "9999", create the
communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The
number of characters is decremented by 1.)
140
PARAMETERS
6)Response time
Data sending time (refer to the following formula)
Inverter data processing time = waiting time + data check time

(set value 10ms) (12ms)
Computer
Inverter ACK ENQ
Inverter STX
10ms or 10ms or
Computer more required more required
Inverter data processing time = waiting time + data check time

(set value 10ms) (12ms)
Computer
Inverter ENQ
Inverter
10ms or
Computer more required
[Formula for data sending time]

Number of data Communication Data
1 x characters specification
x (Total
Communication speed (bps) (Refer to page 139) number of bits) = sending
time (s)
(See below)
zCommunication specification
Name Number of Bits
1 bit
Stop bit length
2 bits
7 bits
Data length
8 bits
Parity Yes 1 bit
check No 0 bit
In addition to the bits in the above table, 1 bit is required for the start bit.
4
Minimum total number of bits....... 9 bits
Maximum total number of bits...... 12 bits
141
PARAMETERS
7)Sum check code
The sum check code is 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte
(8 bits) of the sum (binary) derived from the checked ASCII data.
Waiting
(Example 1) E Station Instruction Sum
Computer → inverter
time
N number code Data check
code
Q 0 1 E 1 1 0 7 A D F 4 ←Binary code
ASCII code → H05 H30 H31 H45 H31 H31 H30 H37 H41 H44 H46 H34
H H H H H H H H H
30 + 31 + 45 + 31 + 31 + 30 + 37 + 41 + 44
H
=1F4
Sum
(Example 2) S E Sum
inverter → Computer T
Station Read time T check
number code
X 0 1 1 7 7 0
X 3 0 ←Binary code
ASCII code → H02 H30 H31 H31 H37 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30
H H H H H H
30 + 31 + 31 + 37 + 37 + 30
H
=130
Sum
8)Error code
If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its definition is sent back to
the computer together with the NAK code. (Refer to page 146.)
Note: 1. When the data from the computer has an error, the inverter will not accept
that data.
2. Any data communication, e.g. run command, monitoring, is started when the
computer gives a communication request. Without the computer's command,
the inverter does not return any data. For monitoring, therefore, design the
program to cause the computer to provide a data read request as required.
3. When the parameter setting is read or written, the data of the link parameter
expansion setting changes depending on the parameter. For the data, refer to
the parameter instruction code list on page 228.
CAUTION
When the inverter's permissible communication time interval is not set,
interlocks are provided to disable operation to prevent hazardous
conditions. Always set the communication check time interval before
starting operation.
Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once
when the computer provides a communication request. If communication
is disabled during operation due to signal cable breakage etc, the inverter
cannot be stopped. When the communication check time interval has
elapsed, the inverter will come to an alarm stop (E.PUE).
The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching on its RES signal or by
switching power off.
If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer fault
etc, the inverter does not detect such a fault. This should be fully noted.
142
PARAMETERS
<Setting items and set data>
After completion of parameter settings, set the instruction codes and data then start
communication from the computer to allow various types of operation control and monitoring.
Number of
Instruction Data Digits
No. Item Code Description (Instruction
code
FF=1)
H0001: External operation
Read H7B
Operation H0002: Communication operation
1 4 digits
mode H0001: External operation
Write HFB
H0002: Communication operation
H0000 to HFFFF:Output frequency (hexadecimal)
Output
in 0.01Hz increments 4 digits
frequency H6F
[Speed (hexadecimal) in r/min (6 digits)
[speed]
increments if Pr. 37 = 1 to 9998]
Output H0000 to HFFFF:Output current (hexadecimal) in
H70 4 digits
current 0.01A increments
Output H0000 to HFFFF:Output voltage (hexadecimal) in
H71 4 digits
voltage 0.1V increments
H0000 to HFFFF:Two most recent alarm
definitions
Alarm definition display
example (instruction code H74)
b15 b8b7 b0
00 11 000 01 010 0 000
Monitoring
Previous alarm Most recent alarm

2 (H30) (HA0)
Alarm data
Data Description Data Description
Alarm H74 to H00 No alarm H80 GF
4 digits
definition H77 H10 OC1 H81 LF
H11 OC2 H90 OHT 4
H12 OC3 HA0 OPT
H20 OV1 HB0 PE
H21 OV2 HB1 PUE
H22 OV3 HB2 RET
H30 THT HC2 P24
H31 THM HF3 E. 3
H40 FIN HF6 E. 6
H60 OLT HF7 E. 7
H70 BE
143
PARAMETERS
Number of
Data Digits
Instruction
No. Item Code
Description (Instruction
code
FF=1)
b7 b0 b0 :
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 b1 : Forward rotation (STF)
b2 : Reverse rotation (STR)
3 Run command HFA [For example 1] b3 : 2 digits
[Example 1] H02 ... Forward b4 :
rotation b5 :
[Example 2] H00 ... Stop b6 :
b7 :
b7 b0 b0: Inverter running (RUN)

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 b1: Forward rotation
b2: Reverse rotation
Inverter status (For example 1) b3: Up to frequency (SU)
4 H7A [Example 1] H02 ... During forward b4: Overload (OL) 2 digits
monitor
rotation b5:
[Example 2] H80 ... Stop due to b6: Frequency detection (FU)
alarm b7: Alarm occurrence
Set frequency
H6D Reads the set frequency (RAM or E2PROM).
read (RAM) 4 digits
Set frequency H0000 to H9C40: 0.01Hz increments (6 digits)
H6E (hexadecimal)
read (E2PROM)
5 Set frequency H0000 to H9C40: 0.01Hz increments (hexadecimal)
HED
write (RAM) (0 to 400.00Hz)
4 digits
To change the set frequency consecutively,
Set frequency (6 digits)
HEE write data to the inverter RAM.
write (E2PROM) (Instruction code: HED)
H9696: Resets the inverter.
As the inverter is reset on start of
6 Inverter reset HFD 4 digits
communication by the computer, the inverter
cannot send reply data back to the computer.
Alarm definition
7 HF4 H9696: Batch clear of alarm history 4 digits
batch clear
All parameters return to the factory settings.
Any of four different all clear operations is
performed according to the data.
Pr. Commu-
Calibra- Other HEC
nication
tion Pr.* HFF
Data Pr.
H9696 { × { {
All parameter H9966 { { { {
8 HFC × × { { 4 digits
clear H5A5A
H55AA × { { {
When all parameter clear is executed for H9696

or H9966, communication-related parameter
settings also return to the factory settings.
When resuming operation, set the parameters
again.
* Pr. 75 and Pr. 146 are not cleared.
144
PARAMETERS
Number of
Data Digits
Instruction
No. Item Code
Description (Instruction
code
FF=1)
H80 to
9 Parameter write
HFD Refer to the "Instruction Code List" (page 228)
4 digits
H00 to and write and/or read the values as required.
10 Parameter read
H7B
Link Parameter description is changed according to
Read H7F
parameter the H00 to H09 setting.
11 2 digits
expansion For details of the settings, refer to the
Write HFF
setting parameter instruction code list (page 228).
Second When setting the bias/gain (instruction codes
parameter Read H6C H5E to H61, HDE to HE1)
changing parameters
12 2 digits
(Instruction H00: Offset/gain
code Write HEC H01: Analog
HFF = 1) H02: Analog value of terminal
REMARKS
For the instruction codes HFF, HEC, their set values are held once they are written,
but changed to 0 when the inverter is reset or all clear is performed.
145
PARAMETERS
<Error Code List>
The corresponding error code in the following list is displayed if an error is detected in
any communication request data from the computer:
Error
Item Definition Inverter Operation
Code
The number of errors consecutively detected
Computer NAK in communication request data from the
H0
error computer is greater than allowed number of
retries.
The parity check result does not match the
H1 Parity error
specified parity.
The sum check code in the computer does Brought to an
Sum check
H2 not match that of the data received by the alarm stop (E.PUE)
error
inverter. if error occurs
Data received by the inverter is in wrong continuously more
protocol, data receive is not completed within than the allowable
H3 Protocol error
given time, or CR and LF are not as set in the number of retries.
parameter.
The stop bit length is not as specified by
H4 Framing error
initialization.
New data has been sent by the computer
H5 Overrun error before the inverter completes receiving the
preceding data.
H6   
Does not accept
The character received is invalid (other than 0 received data but is
H7 Character error
to 9, A to F, control code). not brought to an
alarm stop.
H8   
H9   
Parameter write was attempted in other than
HA Mode error the computer link operation mode or during
inverter operation. Does not accept
received data but is
Instruction code
HB The specified command does not exist. not brought to an
error
alarm stop.
Data range Invalid data has been specified for parameter
HC
error write, frequency setting, etc.
HD   
HE   
HF   
146
PARAMETERS
(5) Communication specifications for RS-485 communication
Operation Mode
Operation Communication
Item
Location Operation from PU External Operation
Connector
Run command (start) Enabled Disabled
Enabled
Running frequency setting Enabled (Combined operation
Computer mode)
user program Monitoring Enabled Enabled
via PU
Parameter write Enabled (*2) Disabled (*2)
connector
Parameter read Enabled Enabled
Inverter reset Enabled Enabled
Stop command (*1) Enabled Enabled
Inverter reset Enabled Enabled
Control circuit
Run command Disabled Enabled
terminal
Running frequency setting Disabled Enabled
*1. As set in Pr. 75 "reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection".
*2. As set in Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection".
Note: At occurrence of RS-485 communication fault, the inverter cannot be reset from
the computer.
(6) Operation at alarm occurrence
Operation Mode
Fault Location Status Communication
External
Operation
Operation
(PU connector)
Inverter operation Stop Stop
Inverter fault
Communication PU connector Continued Continued 4
Communication error Inverter operation Stop/continued (*3) Continued
(Communication from
PU connector) Communication PU connector Stop Stop
*3. Can be selected using the corresponding parameter (factory-set to stop).
(7) Communication error
Fault Location Error Message Remarks
Communication error
Not displayed Error code is E.PUE
(Error in communication from PU connector)
147
PARAMETERS
4.2.37 PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)
Pr. 128 "PID action selection" Related parameters
Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection"
Pr. 129 "PID proportional band" Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr. 130 "PID integral time" Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input
terminal function selection)
Pr. 131 "upper limit" Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal
function selection)
Pr. 132 "lower limit" Pr. 902 to Pr. 905 (frequency
setting voltage (current)
Pr. 133 "PID action set point for PU biases and gains)
operation"
Pr. 134 "PID differential time"
The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g. flow rate, air volume or
pressure.
• The voltage input signal (0 to ±5V or 0 to ±10V) or Pr. 133 setting is used as a set
point and the 4 to 20mA DC current input signal used as a feedback value to
constitute a feedback system for PID control.
Parameter Factory
Number Setting
128 0 0, 20, 21
9999: No proportional
129 100% 0.1 to 1000%, 9999
control
130 1s 0.1 to 3600s, 9999 9999: No integral control
133 0% 0 to 100%
134 9999 0.01 to 10.00s, 9999 9999: No differential control
<Setting>
(1) Basic PID control configuration

Inverter circuit :
Motor
PID operation
Pr. 133 or Treminal 2 Manipulated
+- 1 variable IM
Set point Kp 1+ Ti S +Td S
0 to ±5 (0 to ±10) VDC
Terminal 4
Feedback signal (Process value) 4 to 20mADC
Kp: Proportion constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time
148
PARAMETERS
(2) PID action overview
1) PI action
A combination of proportional control action (P) and integral control action (I) for
providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation and changes with
time.
[Operation example for stepped changes of process value]

Deviation Set point
Note: PI action is the sum of P and I actions. Process value
P action
Time
I action
Time
PI action
Time
2) PD action
A combination of proportional control action
(P) and differential control action (D) for providing a manipulated variable in
response to deviation speed to improve the transient characteristic.
[Operation example for proportional changes of process value]
Set point
Note: PD action is the sum of P and D Deviation
Process
actions. value
P action
Time
D action
Time
PD action
3) PID action Time
4
The PI action and PD action are combined
to utilize the advantages of both actions for control.
Set point
Note: The PID action is the sum of the P,
Deviation
I and D actions. Process
value
P action
Time
I action
Time
D action
Time
y=at2+bt+c
PID action
Time
149
PARAMETERS
4) Reverse action
Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X = (set point
- process value) is positive, and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation
is negative.
Deviation Set point
[Heating]
+ X >0 Cold → up
Set point
X<0 Hot → down
− Process value
Feedback signal
(Process value)
5) Forward action
Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X = (set point
- process value) is negative, and decreases the manipulated variable if
deviation is positive.
Process value
[Cooling]
Too cold → down Set point
Set point
+ X>0
X<0 Hot → up
−
Feedback signal
(Process value) Deviation
Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable (output frequency)

Deviation
Positive Negative
Reverse
action Ò Ô
Forward
action Ô Ò
150
PARAMETERS
(3) Wiring example
• Pr. 128 = 20
• Pr. 190 = 14
• Pr. 191 = 15
• Pr. 192 = 16
Inverter
NFB Motor Pump
R (L1) U
Power supply S (L2) V IM P
T (L3) W
Forward rotation STF

Reverse rotation STR
SD
For 2-wire For 3-wire
(Note 2) type type
Detector
SU Upper limit
10 RUN Lower limit
Setting potentiometer − + + − +
2 SE Limit signal common
(24V)
(OUT)
(Set point setting)
5 A Forward rotation output (COM)
Reverse rotation output
C
Forward (reverse)
4 rotation output
signal common
(Process value) 4 to 20mADC
0 24V
DC power
(Note 1)
supply
AC1φ
200/220V 50/60Hz
Note: 1. The power supply must be selected in accordance with the power
specifications of the detector used.
2. The output signal terminals used depends on the Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 settings.
151
PARAMETERS
(4) I/O signals
Terminal
Signal Function Description
Used
2 2 Set point input Enter the set point for PID control.
Input
Process value Enter the 4 to 20mA process value

4 4
input signal from the detector.
Output to indicate that the process value
FUP Upper limit output
signal exceeded the upper limit value.
Output to indicate that the process value
FDN Lower limit output
Depending on signal exceeded the lower limit value.
Output
Pr. 190 to "Hi" is output to indicate that the output

Pr. 192 Forward (reverse) indication of the parameter unit is
RL rotation direction forward rotation (FWD) or "Low" to
output indicate that it is reverse rotation (REV)
or stop (STOP).
z Enter the set point across inverter terminals 2-5 or in Pr. 133 and enter the process
value signal across inverter terminals 4-5. At this time, set "20" or "21" in Pr. 128.
Item Entry Description
Set 0V as 0% and When "0" is set in Pr. 73 (5V
Across terminals 5V as 100%. selected for terminal 2).
Set point 2-5 Set 0V as 0% and When "1" is set in Pr. 73 (10V
10V as 100%. selected for terminal 2).
Pr. 133 Set the set point (%) in Pr. 133.
Process Across terminals
4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.
value 4-5
152
PARAMETERS
(5) Parameter setting
Parameter
Setting Name Description
Number
0 No PID action
PID action For heating, pressure
128 20 PID reverse action
selection control, etc.
21 For cooling, etc. PID forward action
If the proportional band is narrow (parameter
setting is small), the manipulated variable varies
greatly with a slight change of the process value.
0.1 to PID Hence, as the proportional band narrows, the
129 1000% proportional response sensitivity (gain) improves but the
band stability deteriorates, e.g. hunting occurs.
Gain K = 1/proportional band
9999 No proportional control
Time required for the integral (I) action to provide
the same manipulated variable as that for the
0.1 to
PID integral proportional (P) action. As the integral time
130 3600 s
time decreases, the set point is reached earlier but
hunting occurs more easily.
9999 No integral control.
Set the upper limit. If the feedback value exceeds
0 to
the setting, the FUP signal is output. (Process value
131 100% Upper limit of 4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.)
9999 No function
Set the lower limit. (If the feedback value falls below
0 to
the setting, the FDN signal is output. Process value
132 100% Lower limit of 4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.)
9999 No function
Only valid for the PU command in the PU operation
PID action or PU/external combined operation mode.
0 to set point for For external operation, the voltage across 2-5 is
133
100% PU the set point. 4
operation (Pr. 902 value is equivalent to 0% and Pr. 903
value to 100%.)
Time required for the differential (D) action to
provide the same process value as that for the
0.01 to PID proportional (P) action. As the differential time
134 10.00 s differential increases, greater response is made to the
time deviation change.
9999 No differential control.
(6) Adjustment procedure

Parameter setting Adjust the PID control parameters, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134.
Terminal setting Set the output terminal functions. (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192)
Run
153
PARAMETERS
(7) Calibration example
(A detector of 4mA at 0°C and 20mA at 50°C is used to adjust the room temperature to
25°C under PID control. The set point is given to across inverter terminals 2-5 (0-5V).)
START
Convert the set point into %. …… Detector specifications

When the detector used has the specifications that 0°C is
Calculate the ratio of the set point
equivalent to 4mA and 50°C to 20mA, the set point of 25°C is
to the detector output. 50% because 4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.
Calibration. …… When the set point setting input (0 to 5V) and detector output
(4 to 20mA) must be calibrated, make the following calibration∗.
Set the set point. …… Set point = 50%
Enter a voltage to across Since the specifications of terminal 2 are such that 0% is
terminals 2-5 according to the set equivalent to 0V and 100% to 5V, enter 2.5V into terminal 2.
point (%).
Determine the set point. …… Set the room temperature to 25°C

Determine the set point of the item Set "20" or "21" in Pr. 128 to enable PID control.
to be adjusted.
Operation …… For PU operation, set the set point (0 to 100%) in Pr. 133.
Set the proportional band and During operation, set the proportional band and integral time to
integral time to slightly higher slightly higher values and set the differential time to 9999 (No
values and the differential time to control). In accordance with the system operation, reduce the
proportional band and integral time. For slow response system
9999 (No control), and switch on where a deadband exists, differential control shuold be turned
the start signal. on and increased slowly.
Is the process Yes

value steady?
No
Adjust parameters. Optimize parameters.
Set the proportional band and integral While the process value is steady, the
time to slightly higher values and set proportional band and integral time may
the differential time to a slightly lower be reduced and the differential time
value to stabilize the process value. increased throughout the operation.
END
∗ When calibration is required, use Pr. 902 and Pr. 903 (terminal 2) or
Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 (terminal 4) to calibrate the detector output and
set point setting input in the PU mode during an inverter stop.
154
PARAMETERS
<Set point input calibration>
1. Apply the input voltage of 0% set point setting (e.g. 0V) to across terminals 2-5.
2. Make calibration using Pr. 902. At this time, enter the frequency which should be
output by the inverter at the deviation of 0% (e.g. 0Hz).
3. Apply the voltage of 100% set point setting (e.g. 5V) to across terminals 2-5.
4. Make calibration using Pr. 903. At this time, enter the frequency which should be
output by the inverter at the deviation of 100% (e.g. 60Hz).
<Detector output calibration>

1. Apply the output current of 0% detector setting (e.g. 4mA) across terminals 4-5.
2. Make calibration using Pr. 904.
3. Apply the output current of 100% detector setting (e.g. 20mA) across terminals 4-5.
4. Make calibration using Pr. 905.
Note: The frequencies set in Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 should be the same as set in Pr. 902
and Pr. 903.
The results of the above calibration are as shown below:
[Set point setting] [Detection value] [Manipulated variable]

Manipulated
(%) (%) variable(Hz)
100 100 60
0 0 0
0 5 (V) 0 4 20 (mA) 0 100 Deviation
(%)
Note: 1. Entering multi-speed (RH, RM, RL signal) or JOG operation will stop PID
control and start multi-speed or JOG operation.
2. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, the other
functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding 4
terminals before making settings.
3. When you have chosen the PID control, the minimum frequency is as set in
Pr. 902 and the maximum frequency is as set in Pr. 903.
(The settings of Pr. 1 "maximum frequency" and Pr. 2 "minimum frequency"
are also valid.)
155
PARAMETERS
4.2.38 Frequency setting command selection (Pr. 146)
Pr. 146 "frequency setting command Related parameters
selection" Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
• Used to switch the frequency setting between the frequency setting using the built-in
frequency setting potentiometer and the digital frequency setting using the /
key.
146 0 0, 1, 9999
<Setting>
Pr. 146 Setting Frequency Setting Command
Built-in frequency setting potentiometer valid
0
Frequency setting using the built-in frequency setting potentiometer
Built-in frequency setting potentiometer invalid
Digital frequency setting using the / key
1 Using this method, the frequency is varied continuously by pressing
the / key.
The frequency is varied only while the / key is pressed.
• Frequency setting using the built-in frequency setting
potentiometer is made valid when the frequency setting using the
/ key is "0Hz".
(When you press the / key during operation performed by
9999 the frequency setting potentiometer, the digital frequency setting is
selected and the frequency setting using the potentiometer is made
invalid.)
• When power is switched on with "0" set in Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection", the PU operation mode is selected.
156
PARAMETERS
4.2.39 Output current detection function (Pr. 150, Pr. 151)
Pr. 150 "output current detection level" Related parameters
Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
Pr. 151 "output current detection period" (output terminal function
selection)
• If the output current remains higher than the Pr. 150 setting during inverter operation
for longer than the time set in Pr. 151, the output current detection signal (Y12) is
output from the inverter's open collector output terminal.
(Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 to assign the terminal used for Y12 signal output.)
Parameter Factory Setting 100ms
Number Setting Range Output current
detection signal (Y12) OFF ON OFF
150 150% 0 to 200.0%
Output current
151 0s 0 to 10 s Pr.150
Pr.151
Time
<Setting>
Refer to the following list and set the parameters:
Parameter
Description
Number
Set the output current detection level.
150
100% is the rated inverter current.
Set the output current detection time. Set a period of time from when the
151 output current rises to or above the Pr. 150 setting to when the output current
detection signal (Y12) is output.
Note: 1. Once turned ON, when the output current has risen above the preset 4
detection level, the output current detection signal is held for at least 100ms
(approximately).
2. This function is also valid during execution of offline auto tuning.
functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding
157
PARAMETERS
4.2.40 Zero current detection (Pr. 152, Pr. 153)
Pr. 152 "zero current detection level" Related parameters
Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output
Pr. 153 "zero current detection period" terminal function selection)
When the inverter's output current falls to "0", torque will not be generated. This may
cause a gravity drop when the inverter is used in vertical lift application.
To prevent this, the output current "zero" signal can be output from the inverter to close
the mechanical brake when the output current has fallen to "zero".
• If the output current remains lower than the Pr. 152 setting during inverter operation
for longer than the time set in Pr. 153, the zero current detection (Y13) signal is output
from the inverter's open collector output terminal.
(Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 to assign the terminal used for Y13 signal output.)
152 5.0% 0 to 200.0%
153 0.5 s 0.05 to 1 s
Start signal OFF ON
Pr. 152 "zero current

detection level" Pr.152 (Note) Output current 0 [A]
100ms
Zero current OFF OFF
ON ON
detection signal
output (Y13)
Pr. 153 "detection time" Pr. 153 "detection time"
<Setting>
Refer to the following list and set the parameters:
Parameter
Description
Number
Set the zero current detection level.
152 Set this parameter to define the percentage of the rated current at which the
zero current will be detected.
Set the zero current detection time.
153 Set a period of time from when the output current falls to or below the Pr. 152
setting to when the zero current detection signal (Y13) is output.
Note: 1. If the current rises above the preset detection level but the timing condition
is not satisfied, the zero current detection signal is held on for about 100ms.
2. This function is also valid during execution of offline auto tuning.
158
PARAMETERS
CAUTION
The zero current detection level setting should not be too high, and the
zero current detection time setting should not be too long. Otherwise, the
detection signal may not be output when torque is not generated at a low
output current.
To prevent the machine and equipment from resulting in hazardous
conditions by use of the zero current detection signal, install a safety
backup such as an emergency brake.
4.2.41 User group selection (Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 176)
Pr. 160 "user group read selection"
Pr. 173 "user group 1 registration"
Pr. 174 "user group 1 deletion"
Pr. 175 "user group 2 registration"
Pr. 176 "user group 2 deletion"
Among all parameters, a total of 32 parameters can be registered to two different user
groups. The registered parameters may only be accessed.
The other parameters cannot be read.
Parameter Factory
Number Setting
160 0 0, 1, 10, 11
173 0 0 to 999 4
174 0 0 to 999, 9999 9999: Batch deletion
175 0 0 to 999
176 0 0 to 999, 9999 9999: Batch deletion
159
PARAMETERS
<Examples of use>
(1) Registration of parameter to user group (when registering Pr. 3 to
user group 1)
Flickering
Pr. 173 reading
SET SET
1.5s

The number of Press the / Pr. 3 is registered Press the /
parameters set and key to select the to user group 1. key to shift to the next
registered by the parameter number to parameter to be
user appears. be registered. registered.
Press the SET key to
register the parameter.
(2) Deletion of parameter from the user group (when Pr. 5 is deleted from
user group 1)
Flickering
Pr. 174 reading
SET SET

1.5s
The number of Press the / Pr. 5 is deleted Press the /
parameters set and key to select the from user group 1. key to shift to the next
registered by the parameter number to parameter to be
user appears. be deleted. deleted.
Press the SET key to
delete the parameter.
(3) Set the required value in Pr. 160 to make the user group or groups
valid or invalid.
Pr. 160 Setting Description
0 Accessible to all parameters.
Accessible to only the parameters
1
registered to user group 1.
10
registered to user group 2.
11
registered to user groups 1 and 2.
Note: 1. The Pr. 77, Pr. 160 and Pr. 991 values may always be read independently of
the user group setting.
2. The Pr. 173 or Pr. 174 value read indicates the number of parameters
registered to group 1, and the Pr. 175 or Pr. 176 value read indicates the
number of parameters registered to group 2.
3. If "0" is set in the second digit of two-digit Pr. 160, it is not displayed.
However, "0" is displayed when it is set in the first digit only.
4. When "9999" is set in Pr. 174 or Pr. 176, the parameters registered to the
corresponding user group are batch-deleted.
160
PARAMETERS
4.2.42 Actual operation hour meter clear (Pr. 171)
Pr. 171 "actual operation hour meter Related parameter
clear" Pr. 52 "operation panel/PU main
display data selection"
You can clear the monitor (actual operation hour) value which is selected when Pr. 52 is
"23".
171 0 0
<Setting>
Write "0" in the parameter to clear the actual operation hour.
Pr. 173 to Pr. 176 ÎRefer to Pr. 160.
4.2.43 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183)
Pr. 180 "RL terminal function selection"

Pr. 181 "RM terminal function selection"
Pr. 182 "RH terminal function selection"
Pr. 183 "MRS terminal function selection"
Use these parameters to select/change the input terminal functions.
Parameter Terminal Factory Factory-Set Terminal Setting 4
Number Symbol Setting Function Range
Low-speed operation
180 RL 0 0 to 8, 16, 18
command (RL)
Middle-speed operation
181 RM 1 0 to 8, 16, 18
command (RM)
High-speed operation
182 RH 2 0 to 8, 16, 18
command (RH)
183 MRS 6 Output shut-off (MRS) 0 to 8, 16, 18
161
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
Refer to the following list and set the parameters.
Signal Related
Setting Function
Name Parameters
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6
Pr. 59 = 0 Low-speed operation command Pr. 24 to Pr. 27
0 RL Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 59 = 1, 2 * Remote setting (setting clear) Pr. 59
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6,
Middle-speed operation
Pr. 59 = 0 Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
1 RM command
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 59 = 1, 2 * Remote setting (deceleration) Pr. 59
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6,
Pr. 59 = 0 High-speed operation command Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
2 RH Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 59 = 1, 2 * Remote setting (acceleration) Pr. 59
3 RT Second function selection Pr. 44 to Pr. 48
4 AU Current input selection (Note 6)
5 STOP Start self-holding terminal
6 MRS Output shut-off terminal
External thermal relay input **
7 OH The external thermal relay provided for overheat Refer to page 189
protection or the embedded temperature relay
within the motor is activated to stop the inverter.
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6,
15-speed selection (combination with three
8 REX Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
speeds of RL, RM, RH)
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
16 X16 PU operation-external operation switch-over Pr. 79
General-purpose magnetic flux vector-V/F switch-
18 X18 over (OFF: general-purpose magnetic flux vector Pr. 80
control, ON: V/F control) (Note 3)
* : When Pr. 59 = "1" or "2", the functions of the RL, RM and RH signals change as
listed above.
**: Activated when the relay contact "opens".
Note: 1. One function can be assigned to two or more terminals. In this case, the
terminal inputs are OR' ed.
2. The speed command priorities are higher in order of multi-speed setting
(RH, RM, RL, REX) and AU.
3. When V/F control is selected using the V/F-general-purpose magnetic flux
switch-over function, the secondary functions are also selected.
During operation, you cannot switch between V/F and general-purpose
magnetic flux. Should you switch between V/F and general-purpose
magnetic flux, only the second functions are selected.
4. Use common terminals to assign multi-speeds (7 speeds) and remote
setting. They cannot be set individually.
(Common terminals are used since these functions are designed for
multiple speed setting and need not be set at the same time.)
5. Functions are invalid if values other than the above are set to Pr. 180 to Pr.
183 (input terminal function selection).
6. Turning the AU signal on makes voltage input invalid.
162
PARAMETERS
4.2.44 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192)
Pr. 190 "RUN terminal function selection"
Pr. 191 "FU terminal function selection"
Pr. 192 "A, B, C terminal function selection"
You can change the functions of the open collector and contact output terminals.
Parameter Terminal Factory Factory-Set Terminal Setting
Number Symbol Setting Function Range
190 RUN 0 Inverter running 0 to 99
191 FU 4 Output frequency detection 0 to 99
192 ABC 99 Alarm output 0 to 99
<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameters:
Signal Related
Setting Function Operation
Name Parameters
Output during operation when the
0 RUN Inverter running inverter output frequency rises to or 
above the starting frequency.
Refer to Pr. 41 "up-to-frequency
1 SU Up to frequency Pr. 41
sensitivity". (Note 1)
Output while stall prevention Pr. 22, Pr. 23,
3 OL Overload alarm
function is activated. Pr. 66
Output frequency Refer to Pr. 42, Pr. 43 (output
4 FU Pr. 42, Pr. 43
detection frequency detection).
Inverter operation Output when the inverter is ready to be
11 RY 
ready started by switching the start signal on.
Output current Refer to Pr. 150 and Pr. 151 Pr. 150,
12 Y12
detection (output current detection). Pr. 151
Zero current Refer to Pr. 152 and Pr. 153 Pr. 152,
13 Y13
detection (zero current detection). Pr. 153 4
14 FDN PID lower limit
15 FUP PID upper limit
Refer to Pr. 128 to Pr. 134 (PID Pr. 128 to
PID forward- control). Pr. 134
16 RL reverse rotation
output
Capacitor life alarm Refer to Pr.503 and Pr.504
95 Y95 Pr. 503, Pr. 504
output (capacitor life alarm).
Output when a minor fault (fan
Pr. 121,
98 LF Minor fault output failure or communication error
Pr. 244
warning) occurs.
Output when the inverter's
99 ABC Alarm output protective function is activated to 
stop the output (major fault).
Note: 1. The same function may be set to more than one terminal.
2. Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 do not function if the values set are other than the above.
163
PARAMETERS
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239Î Refer to Pr. 4.

Pr. 240Î Refer to Pr. 72.
4.2.45 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244)
Pr. 244 "cooling fan operation selection"

You can control the operation of the cooling fan built in the inverter (whether there is a
cooling fan or not depends on the models. Refer to the outline dimensional drawings
(page 220)).
244 0 0, 1
<Setting>
Setting Description
Operated at power on (independent of whether the inverter is running or
0
at a stop).
Cooling fan on-off control valid
(The cooling fan is always on while the inverter is running. During a stop,
1
the inverter status is monitored and the fan switches on-off according to
temperature.)
<Reference>
In either of the following cases, fan operation is regarded as faulty, [FN] is shown on the
operation panel, and the minor fault (LF) signal is output. Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
(output terminal function selection) to allocate the terminal used to output the LF signal.
1) Pr. 244 = "0"
When the fan comes to a stop with power on.
2) Pr. 244 = "1"
When the inverter is running and the fan stops during fan ON command.
Note: When the terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, the other
164
PARAMETERS
4.2.46 Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247)
Pr. 245 "rated motor slip"
Pr. 246 "slip compensation response time"
Pr. 247 "constant-output region slip compensation selection"
The inverter output current may be used to assume motor slip to keep the motor speed
constant.
Parameter Factory
Number Setting
245 9999 0 to 50%, 9999 9999: No slip compensation
246 0.5 0.01 to 10 s
9999: Slip compensation is made in
the constant output region when
247 9999 0, 9999
Pr.245 ≠ "9999"and slip
compensation is selected.
<Setting>
Synchronous speed at base frequency - rated speed
Rated slip = ×100[%]
Synchronous speed at base frequency
Parameter
Setting Function
Number
0 to 50% Used to set the rated motor slip.
245
9999 Slip compensation is not made.
246 0.01 to 10 s Used to set the slip compensation response time. (Note)
Slip compensation is not made in the constant output
0
range (frequency range above the frequency set in Pr. 3).
247 Slip compensation is made in the constant output region
9999 when Pr.245 ≠ "9999"and slip compensation is selected.
Slip compensation is not made when Pr.245 = "9999"
4
Note: When this value is made smaller, response will be faster.

However, as load inertia is greater, a regenerative overvoltage (OVT) error is
more liable to occur.
165
PARAMETERS
4.2.47 Earth (ground) fault detection at start (Pr. 249)
(400V class does not have this function)
Pr. 249 "earth (ground) fault detection at start"

You can select whether earth (ground) fault detection at start is made or not. Earth
(ground) fault detection is made only immediately after the start signal is input to the
inverter.
If an earth (ground) fault occurs during operation, the protective function is not
activated.
249 0 0, 1
<Setting>
Setting Description
0 Earth (ground) fault detection not made
1 Earth (ground) fault detection made
Note: 1. Since detection is made at a start, an about 20ms output delay occurs at
every start.
2. When an earth (ground) fault is detected with "1" set in Pr. 249, alarm output
"E.GF" is detected and the output is shut off.
3. If the motor capacity is less than 0.1kW, earth (ground) fault protection may
not be provided.
166
PARAMETERS
4.2.48 Stop selection (Pr. 250)
Pr. 250 "stop selection" Related parameters
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 44 "second acceleration/
deceleration time"
Pr. 45 "second deceleration
time"
Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start
signal (STF/STR) switches off.
Parameter Factory
Setting Range
Number Setting
0 to 100 s, 1000 to
250 9999
1100 s, 8888, 9999
(1) Pr. 250 = "9999"
When the start signal switches off, the motor is decelerated to a stop.
Start signal
ON OFF
Output
frequency Decelerated when start signal switches off.
(Hz)
Deceleration time (time set in Pr. 8, etc.)
DC brake
Time
(2) Pr. 250 = 0 to 100s (output is shut off after preset time) 4
The output is shut off when the time set in Pr. 250 has elapsed after the start signal
was switched off. The motor coasts to a stop.
Start signal
OFF
Output is shut off when time set in Pr. 250
has elapsed after start signal was switched
Output off.
frequency
(Hz)
Motor coasts to a stop.
Time
RUN signal
OFF
167
PARAMETERS
When the Pr. 250 value is 8888, the functions of terminals STF and STR change as
shown below:
STF = start signal, STR = rotation direction signal
STF STR Inverter Operating Status
OFF OFF
Stop
OFF ON
ON OFF Forward rotation
ON ON Reverse rotation
When the Pr. 250 value is any of 1000 to 1100s, the functions of terminals STF and STR
are the same as when the Pr. 250 value is 8888.
Also, for the stopping method used when the start signal switches off, the output is shut
off (the motor coasts to a stop) after the period set in Pr. 250 (i.e. 1000s) have elapsed.
Note: 1. The RUN signal switches off when the output stops.
2. When the start signal is switched on again during motor coasting, the motor
starts at 0Hz.
3. When the Pr. 250 value is 0, the output is shut off within the shortest time.
4.2.49 Output phase failure protection selection (Pr. 251)
Pr. 251 "Output phase failure protection selection"
You can make invalid the output phase failure protection (E.LF) function which stops the
inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load
side) becomes open.
Choose "without output phase failure protection" when the motor capacity is smaller
than the inverter capacity (when the output current is less than approximately 25% of
the rated inverter current value as a guideline), since performing operation in such a
case may activate output phase failure protection.
Minimum
Setting Description
Number Range Setting
Increments
0: Without output phase failure
protection
251 0, 1 1 1
1: With output phase failure
protection
Pr. 342 Î Refer to Pr. 117
168
PARAMETERS
4.2.50 Capacitor life alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504) (No function for the
400V class)
Pr. 503 "capacitor life timer" Related parameter

Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output
Pr. 504 "capacitor life alarm output set
terminal function selection)
time"
Indicate the replacement time (note 1) of the inverter main circuit smoothing capacitor by
outputting the capacitor life alarm output signal "Y95" when the cumulative energization
time of the inverter reaches the time set in Pr.504 "capacitor life alarm output set time".
Parameter Factory
Setting Range
Number Setting
503 — —
504 500 (50000h) 0 to 9998, (9999)
<Setting>
Parameter
Setting Description Remarks
Number
Display the cumulative
The capacitor life is
energization time of the inverter
counted every 1h and the
503 — in 100h increments. (Cannot be
figures above hundreds
written.)
are displayed.
Clamped at 9998(999800h).
Set the time until the By setting "95" in Pr.190
0 to 9998 maintenance timer alarm signal to Pr.192 "output terminal
(Y95) is output. function selection", the
504
capacitor life alarm signal
For maker setting.
9999 "Y95" can be output.
The set time is 50000h.
(Refer to page 163.)
First power ON
999800h
4
Capacitor life timer Pr. 504
(Pr. 503)
Y95 output / display OFF ON

The life of electrolytic capacitor is about eight years (50000h) if used for 20 hours a day
and 300 days a year in the average yearly ambient temperature of 35ºC. (Note 2)
The life of electrolytic capacitor decreases to half if the ambient temperature increases
by 10ºC and doubles if decreases by 10ºC. Please note this as reference when setting
the time
For example, when the average yearly ambient temperature is 45ºC, set "250" (25000h)
in Pr. 504.
Note: 1. For replacement of the capacitor, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.
2. The estimated life time (50000h) of the capacitor differs according to the
environmental conditions (ambient temperature, conditions, etc.) of the
inverter.
169
PARAMETERS
4.2.51 Meter (frequency meter) calibration (Pr. 900)
Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration" Related parameters
Pr. 54 "FM terminal function
selection"
Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring
reference"
Pr. 56 "current monitoring
reference"
z By using the operation panel or parameter
unit, you can calibrate a meter connected to terminal FM to full scale deflection.
z Terminal FM provides the pulse output. By setting Pr. 900, you can calibrate the
meter connected to the inverter from the parameter unit without providing a
calibration resistor.
z You can display a digital value on a digital counter using the pulse train signal from
terminal FM. A 1440 pulses/s output is provided at the full scale value as explained in
the section of Pr. 54. When the running frequency has been selected for monitoring,
the ratio of this FM terminal output frequency can be set in Pr. 55.
Meter
1mA full scale
Analog meter (Digital meter)
T1 1440pulses/s (+) (−)
1mA
FM FM
(+) (−)
*Calibration 8VDC
resistor
SD T2 SD
Pulse width T1 : Adjusted with Pr. 900 Note : The parameter is factory-set to 1mA
Pulse period T2 : Set in Pr. 55 (frequency monitoring) full-scale or 1440pulses/s.
Set in Pr. 56 (current monitoring) FM output frequency at 60Hz.
* Not needed when the operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04) is used for
calibration. Used when calibration must be made near the frequency meter for
such a reason as a remote frequency meter. However, the frequency meter
needle may not deflect to full-scale if the calibration resisitor is connected. In this
case, use this resistor and the operation panel or parameter unit together.
(1) Calibration of terminal FM
1) Connect a meter (frequency meter) across inverter terminals FM-SD.
(Note the polarity. FM is the positive terminal.)
2) When a calibration resistor has already been connected, adjust the
resistance to "0" or remove the resistor.
3) Set any of "0 to 2" in Pr. 54.
When the running frequency or inverter output current has been selected as
the output signal, preset in Pr. 55 or Pr. 56 the running frequency or current
at which the output signal is 1440pulses/s.
At this 1440 pulses/s, the meter normally deflects to full scale.
170
PARAMETERS
<Operation procedure>
• When using the operation panel
1) Select the PU operation mode.
2) Set the running frequency.
4) Read Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration".
5) Press the FWD key to run the inverter. (Motor need not be connected.)
6) Hold down the / key to adjust the meter needle to a required position.
(Depending on the setting, it may take some time until the needle moves.)
7) Press the SET key for about 1.5s.
STOP
8) Press the RESET key to stop the inverter.
REMARKS
Calibration can also be made for external operation. Set the frequency in the
external operation mode and make calibration in the steps 4) to 8).
Note: 1. Pr. 900 is factory-set to 1mA full-scale and FM output frequency of 1440
4
pulses/s at 60Hz. The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400
pulses/s.
2. When a frequency meter is connected across terminals FM-SD to monitor
the running frequency, the FM terminal output is filled to capacity at the
factory setting if the maximum output frequency reaches or exceeds 100Hz.
In this case, the Pr. 55 setting must be changed to the maximum frequency.
3. It is possible to calibrate even during operation.
171
PARAMETERS
4.2.52 Biases and gains of the frequency setting voltage (current)
and built-in frequency setting potentiometer
(Pr. 902 to Pr. 905, Pr. 922, Pr. 923)
Pr. 902 "frequency setting voltage bias" Related parameters

Pr. 38 "frequency at 5V (10V) input"
Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain" Pr. 39 "frequency at 20mA input"
Pr. 73 "0-5/0-10V selection"
Pr. 904 "frequency setting current bias" Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr.146"frequency setting
Pr. 905 "frequency setting current gain" command selection"
Pr. 922 "built-in frequency setting potentiometer bias"

Pr. 923 "built-in frequency setting potentiometer gain"
You can set the output frequency as desired in relation to the frequency setting
potentiometer of the operation panel or the external frequency setting signal (0 to 5V,0
to 10V or 4 to 20mA DC).
The "bias" and "gain" functions are used to adjust the relationship between the input
signal entered from outside the inverter (to set the output frequency), i.e. 0 to 5VDC,0 to
10VDC or 4 to 20mADC, and the output frequency.
z Use Pr. 902 to set the bias of the voltage signal and use Pr. 903 to set its gain
z Use Pr. 904 to set the bias of the current signal and use Pr. 905 to set its gain.
z Use Pr. 922 to set the bias of the operation panel's potentiometer and use Pr. 923 to
set its gain.
Parameter Factory
Setting Range
Number Setting (*)
902 0V 0Hz 0 to 10V 0 to 60Hz Factory setting
903 5V 60Hz 0 to 10V 1 to 400Hz (60Hz)
904 4mA 0Hz 0 to 20mA 0 to 60Hz
905 20mA 60Hz 0 to 20mA 1 to 400Hz Gain Pr.903
Bias Pr.905
922 0V 0Hz 0 to 5V 1 to 60Hz Pr.902 Pr.923
923 5V 60Hz 0 to 5V 1 to 400Hz Pr.904
0 5V Pr.73
* Factory settings may differ because of Pr.922 0 10V
4 20mA
calibration parameters. Frequency setting signal
<Setting>
(1) The frequency setting voltage (current) biases and gains may be adjusted by any
of the three following ways:
1) Any point can be adjusted with a voltage applied across terminals 2-5 (with a
current flowing across terminals 4-5).
2) Any point can be adjusted with no voltage applied across terminals 2-5 (with no
current flowing across terminals 4-5).
3) Only the bias and gain frequencies are adjusted and the voltage (current) is not
adjusted.
172
PARAMETERS
(2) The bias and gain of the frequency setting potentiometer may also be adjusted by
any of the three following ways:
1) Any point can be adjusted with the potentiometer being turned.
2) Any point can be adjusted without the potentiometer being turned.
3) Only the bias and gain frequencies are adjusted.
Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain"

(Pr. 902, Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 can also be adjusted similarly.)
<Adjustment procedure>
When using an external frequency setting signal to set the frequency.
(1) Power-on (monitoring mode)
Hz
MON
PU
MODE SET REV
STOP
FWD MAX
RESET
MIN
(2) Choose the PU operation mode.

1) Using the MODE key, make sure that the PU operation mode has been selected.
zFrequency setting zParameter setting
zMonitoring mode mode mode
MODE MODE MODE
Hz Hz
MON
PU PU PU EXT
zOperation mode
(PU operation mode)
zHelp mode
MODE MODE
PU
4
PU MODE SET REV
FWD
STOP
RESET MAX
MIN
Confirm that the PU operation mode

( ) has been chosen.
In the JOG operation mode ( )
or external operation mode ( ),
press the / key to display .
If cannot be displayed by pressing
the / key in the external operation mode
( ) (if Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection" ≠ "0"), refer to 2) and set "1" (PU
operation mode) in Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection".
173
PARAMETERS
2)Set "1" (PU operation mode) in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection".
Example: To change the external operation mode (Pr. 79=2) to the PU operation
mode (Pr. 79=1)
Using the MODE key,

choose the "parameter
setting mode" as in 1).
zParameter setting mode

EXT digit flickers Middle digit flickers digit flickers
SET SET
MODE SET REV
STOP
FWD RESET MAX
MIN
×7 times ×9 times
SET
0 to 9 0 to 9
zCurrent setting zSetting change

SET
Press for
1.5s
SET
zSetting write
If appears, make sure that the forward

rotation (STF) or reverse rotation (STR) signal
connected to the control terminal is not on.
Flicker
If it is on, turn it off.

If appears, you did not press the SET
key for 1.5 s when writing the setting.
174
PARAMETERS
3)Set "1" (built-in frequency setting potentiometer invalid) in Pr. 146 "frequency
setting command selection".
Change the setting of built-in frequency setting potentiometer valid (Pr. 146 = 0)
to that of built-in frequency setting potentiometer invalid (Pr. 146 = 1).
Using the MODE key,

setting mode" as in (2) -1).

PU EXT digit flickers Middle digit flickers digit flickers
SET
MODE SET REV
STOP
FWD MAX
RESET
MIN
× Once × 4 times × 6 times

SET SET
0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9

SET SET
Press for
1.5s
SET
4
Setting write
If appears and the RUN indication is

lit or flickering, stop operation by pressing the
STOP
RESET key or by turning off the forward rotation
Flicker
(STF) or reverse rotation (STR) signal
connected to the control terminal.
"1" (built-in frequency setting potentiometer
invalid) has been set in Pr. 146.
If appears, you did not press the
SET key for 1.5s when writing the setting.
Press the key once, press the SET key,

and restart the setting from the beginning.
175
PARAMETERS
(3) Read Pr. 903 and show the current setting of the gain frequency.
(Pr. 902, Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 can also be adjusted similarly.)
Using the MODE key, choose the
"parameter setting mode" as in (2)-1).
Hz RUN (Note) When Pr.146="0", reading Pr.902

A MON
PU EXT and Pr.903 results in .
MODE SET REV
STOP
FWD MAX
RESET
MIN
SET
Most significant Middle digit Least significant

digit flickers. flickers. digit flickers.
SET
×9 times ×3 times
SET
SET
0 to 9 0 to 9
Current setting of gain frequency

Hz RUN
A
PU EXT
(4) Set a gain frequency in Pr. 903 and show the analog voltage value across
terminals 2-5 in % (when the frequency is set to 80Hz)
Current setting of zChanging the gain
gain frequency frequency
Hz RUN Hz RUN
A A MON
PU EXT PU EXT
Press to change
the set frequency.
Press for 1.5s
SET
zAnalog voltage value (%)

across terminals 2-5
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
In any of the methods in (5)-1) to (5)-3) on the following

page, continue the setting until the analog voltage value
flickers. If you end the setting here, the gain frequency
change will not be reflected.
176
PARAMETERS
z When not adjusting the gain voltage → go to (5)-1)
z When adjusting any point by applying a voltage → go to (5)-2)
z When adjusting any point without applying a voltage → go to (5)-3)
(5)-1)How to adjust only the gain frequency and not to adjust the voltage
zAnalog voltage value (%) zPress the or key once to display
across terminals 2-5 the current analog voltage calibration value.
Hz RUN
A MON Example: When analog voltage
PU EXT
adjustment value is
Press for 1.5s 100% (5V)
SET
Flicker go to (6)
(5)-2) How to adjust any point by applying a voltage across terminals 2-5 (e.g. from the
external potentiometer) (current: across terminals 4-5) (when applying 5V))
zAnalog voltage zApply a 5V voltage.
value (%) across (Turn the external potentiometer
terminals 2-5 connected across terminals 2-5 to maximum.)
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
Press for 1.5s

SET
When the potentiometer

Flicker is at the maximum position, go to (6)
the value is nearly 100 (%).
(5)-3)How to adjust any point without applying a voltage across terminals 2-5 (without a
4
current flowing across terminals 4-5) (when changing from 4V (80%) to 5V (100%)
zAnalog voltage zPress the or key zSet the gain voltage (%)
value (%) across once to display the current with the / key.
terminals 2-5 analog voltage calibration [0(%) for 0V (0mA), 100(%)
value. for 5V (10V, 20mA)]
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
/
Press for 1.5s
SET
Flicker go to (6)
177
PARAMETERS
(6) Press the SET key to shift to the next parameter.

(7) Re-set Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" according to the operation mode to be
used.
Note: 1. If the Pr. 903 or Pr. 905 (gain adjustment) value is changed, the Pr. 20 value
does not change.
2. When the Pr. 903 or Pr. 905 value is set, the value of Pr. 38 "frequency at
5V (10V) input" or Pr. 39 "frequency at 20mA input" changes automatically.
CAUTION
Be careful when setting the bias frequency at 0V to any value other than
"0". Even without the speed command, the motor will start running at the
set frequency by merely switching on the start signal.
178
PARAMETERS
Pr. 923 "built-in frequency setting potentiometer gain"
(Pr. 922 can be adjusted in the same manner)
When the built-in frequency setting potentiometer is used to set the bias and gain of the
built-in frequency setting potentiometer to set the magnitude (slope) of the output
frequency as desired.
)
(1) Power-on (monitoring mode)
Hz
MON
PU
MODE SET REV
STOP
FWD MAX
RESET
MIN
(2) Choose the PU operation mode.

1)Using the MODE key, make sure that the PU operation mode has been selected.
zFrequency setting zParameter setting
zMonitoring mode mode mode
MODE MODE MODE
Hz Hz
MON
PU PU PU EXT
zOperation mode
(PU operation mode)
zHelp mode
MODE MODE
PU
PU MODE SET REV
FWD
STOP
RESET MAX
MIN
Confirm that the PU operation mode 4

( ) has been chosen.
In the JOG operation mode ( )
or external operation mode ( ),
press the / key to display .
If cannot be displayed by pressing
the / key in the external operation mode
( ) (if Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection" ≠ "0"), refer to 2) and set "1" (PU
operation mode) in Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection".
179
PARAMETERS
2)Set "1" (PU operation mode) in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection".
Example: To change the external operation mode (Pr. 79 = 2) to the PU operation
mode (Pr. 79 = 1)
Using the MODE key,

setting mode" as in 1).

EXT digit flickers Middle digit flickers digit flickers
SET SET
MODE SET REV
STOP
FWD MAX
RESET
MIN
× 7 times × 9 times
SET
0 to 9 0 to 9

SET
Press for
1.5s
SET
Setting write
If appears, make sure that the forward

rotation (STF) or reverse rotation (STR) signal
connected to the control terminal is not on.
Flicker
If it is on, turn it off.

If appears, you did not press the SET
key for 1.5s when writing the setting.
Restart the procedure from the beginning.
180
PARAMETERS
3)Set "0" (built-in frequency setting potentiometer valid) in Pr. 146 "frequency
setting command selection".
Change the setting of built-in frequency setting potentiometer invalid (Pr. 146 = 1)
to that of built-in frequency setting potentiometer valid (Pr. 146 = 0).
Using the MODE key,

setting mode" as in (2) -1).

PU EXT digit flickers Middle digit flickers digit flickers
SET
MODE SET REV
STOP
FWD MAX
RESET
MIN
× Once × 4 times × 6 times

SET SET
0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9

SET SET
Press for
1.5s
SET
4
Setting write
If appears and the RUN indication is

lit or flickering, stop operation by pressing the
STOP
RESET key or by turning off the forward rotation
Flicker (STF) or reverse rotation (STR) signal
connected to the control terminal.
"0" (built-in frequency setting potentiometer
valid) has been set in Pr. 146.
If appears, you did not press the
SET key for 1.5s when writing the setting.
Press the key once, press the SET key,

and restart the setting from the beginning.
181
PARAMETERS
(3) Read Pr. 923 and show the current setting of the gain frequency.
(Pr. 922 can also be adjusted similarly.)
zParameter setting mode
Using the MODE key, choose the
"parameter setting mode" as in (2)-1).
Hz RUN
A MON
PU
MODE SET REV
STOP
FWD MAX
RESET
MIN
SET
Most significant Middle digit Least significant

digit flickers. flickers. digit flickers.
×9 times ×2 times ×3 times

SET SET
SET
0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9
Current setting of gain frequency

Hz RUN
A
PU EXT
(4) Set a new gain frequency in Pr. 923 and show the analog voltage value of the
built-in frequency setting potentiometer. (when the frequency is set to 80Hz at
MAX)
zCurrent setting of gain zChanging the gain

frequency frequency
Hz RUN Hz RUN
A A MON
PU EXT PU EXT
A near-0 value is shown at the Press to change

MIN position of the the set frequency.
potentiometer, and near-100 at Press for 1.5s
MAX. SET
Set to the potentiometer zAnalog voltage value (%) of the built-in

position where operation is to frequency setting potentiometer
be performed at the set Hz RUN
A MON
frequency PU EXT
(80Hz in the example). In any of the methods in (5)-1) to (5)-3) on the

following pages, continue the setting until the analog
voltage value flickers. If you end the setting here, the
gain frequency change will not be reflected.
182
PARAMETERS
z When adjusting any point by turning the potentiometer → go to (5)-1)
z When not adjusting the gain voltage → go to (5)-2)
z When adjusting any point without turning the potentiometer → go to (5)-3)
(5)-1)How to adjust any point by turning the built-in frequency setting potentiometer
(when applying 5V)
zAnalog voltage
value (%) of the zTurn the potentiometer zThe gain voltage
built-in frequency to the gain frequency corresponding to the
potentiometer position appears.
setting potentiometer output (MAX) position.
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
Press for 1.5s

SET
When the potentiometer
is at the MAX position,
the value is nearly 100.
Flicker
go to (6)
(5)-2)How to adjust the gain frequency only without the voltage being adjusted
zAnalog voltage value (%)

of the built-in frequency zPress the or key once to display
setting potentiometer the current analog voltage adjustment.
Hz RUN
A MON Example: When analog voltage
PU EXT
adjustment value is 100%
Press for 1.5s
SET
Flicker go to (6)
4
(5)-3) How to adjust any point without turning the potentiometer (When changing from
4V (80%) to 5V (100%))
zAnalog voltage zPress the or zSet the gain voltage (%) with
value (%) of the key once to display the / key.
built-in frequency the current analog [0(%) for 0V (0mA), 100(%) for
setting potentiometer voltage calibration value. 5V (10V, 20mA)]
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
/
Press for 1.5s
SET
Flicker go to (6)
183
PARAMETERS
(6) Press the SET key to shift to the next parameter.

(7) Re-set Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" according to the operation mode to be
used.
CAUTION
You should be careful when setting any value other than "0" to the bias
frequency at 0V, since the motor will start at the preset frequency by
merely turning on the start signal if no speed command is given.
184
CHAPTER 5
PROTECTIVE
FUNCTIONS
This chapter explains the "protective functions" of this product.
Chapter 1
5.1 Errors (Alarms) ........................................ 186

5.2 Troubleshooting ....................................... 196
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
185
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5.1 Errors (Alarms)

If any fault has occurred in the inverter, the corresponding protective function is
activated to bring the inverter to an alarm stop and automatically give the corresponding
error (alarm) indication on the PU display.
If your fault does not correspond to any of the following errors or if you have any other
problem, please contact your sales representative.
• Retention of alarm output signal ...... When the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on
the power supply side of the inverter is opened
at the activation of the protective function, the
inverter's control power will be lost and the
alarm output will not be held.
• Alarm indication ............................... When the protective function is activated, the
operation panel display automatically switches
to the above indication.
• Resetting method............................... When the protective function is activated, the
inverter output is kept stopped. Unless reset,
therefore, the inverter cannot restart. Switch power
off once, then on again; or apply RES signal for
more than 0.1s. Kept on, "Err." appears (flickers) to
indicate that the inverter is being reset.
• When the protective function is activated, take the appropriate corrective action, then
reset the inverter, and resume operation.
5.1.1 Error (alarm) definitions
(1) Major faults
When the protective function is activated, the inverter output is shut off and the alarm is
output.
Operation Panel Indication E. OC1 FR-PU04 OC During Acc

Name Overcurrent shut-off during acceleration
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds
Description approximately 200% of the rated current during acceleration,
the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output
Check for sudden acceleration.
Check that the downward acceleration time is not long in
Check point
vertical lift application.
Check for output short-circuit/earth (ground) fault.
Increase the acceleration time. (Shorten the downward
Corrective action
acceleration time in vertical lift application.)
186
Operation Panel Indication E. OC2 FR-PU04 Stedy Spd OC

Name Overcurrent shut-off during constant speed
Description approximately 200% of the rated current during constant speed,
the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
Check for sudden load change.
Check point
Check for output short-circuit/earth (ground) fault.
Corrective action Keep load stable.
Operation Panel Indication E. OC3 FR-PU04 OC During Dec

Name Overcurrent shut-off during deceleration
approximately 200% of the rated current during deceleration
Description
(other than acceleration or constant speed), the protective
circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
Check for sudden speed reduction.
Check point Check for output short-circuit/earth (ground) fault.
Check for too fast operation of motor's mechanical brake.
Increase the deceleration time.
Corrective action
Adjust brake operation.
Operation Panel Indication E. OV1 FR-PU04 OV During Acc

Name Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during acceleration
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC
voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protective circuit
Description
is activated to stop the inverter output. It may also be activated by a
surge voltage generated in the power supply system.
Check for too slow acceleration. (e.g. during descending
Check point
acceleration with lifting load)
Corrective action Decrease the acceleration time.
Operation Panel Indication E. OV2 FR-PU04 Stedy Spd OV

Name Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during constant speed
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main 5
circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the
Description protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
It may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the
power supply system.
Check point Check for sudden load change.
• Keep load stable.
Corrective action • Use the brake unit, high power factor converter (FR-HC) or
power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
187
Operation Panel Indication E. OV3 FR-PU04 OV During Dec

Name Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during deceleration or stop
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main
circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the
Description protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
It may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the
power supply system.
Check point Check for sudden speed reduction.
• Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time
which matches the moment of inertia of the load)
Corrective action • Decrease the braking duty.
• Use the brake unit, high power factor converter (FR-HC) or
power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
I
Operation Panel Indication E. THM FR-PU04 Motor Overload

Motor overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function)
Name
(Note 1)
The electronic overcurrent protection in the inverter detects
motor overheat due to overload or reduced cooling capability
Description during constant-speed operation to stop the inverter output.
When a multi-pole motor or two or more motors are run,
provide a thermal relay on the output side of the inverter.
Check point Check the motor for use under overload.
• Reduce the load weight.
Corrective action • For the constant-torque motor, change the Pr. 71 setting to
the constant-torque motor setting.
Operation Panel Indication E. THT FR-PU04 Inv. Overload

Inverter overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function)
Name
(Note 1)
If a current of more than 150% of the rated output current
flows and overcurrent shut-off does not occur (200% or less),
Description inverse-time characteristics cause the electronic thermal relay
function to be activated to stop the inverter output in order to
protect the output transistors.
Corrective action Reduce the load weight.
Note: 1. Resetting the inverter initializes the internal heat integrating data of the
electronic thermal relay function.
188
Operation Panel Indication E. FIN FR-PU04 H/Sink O/Temp

Name Fin overheat
If the heatsink overheats, the temperature sensor is actuated
Description
to stop the inverter output.
• Check for too high ambient temperature.
Check point
• Check for heatsink clogging.
Corrective action Set the ambient temperature to within the specifications.
Operation Panel Indication E. BE FR-PU04 Br. Cct. Fault (Note)

Name Brake transistor alarm detection
If a brake transistor fault occurs due to excessively large
regenerative energy from the motor, for example, that fault is
Description
detected to stop the inverter output. In this case, the inverter
power must be switched off immediately.
Check point Check for improper braking duty.
Change the inverter.
Corrective action
Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel Indication E. GF FR-PU04 Ground Fault

Name Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent protection
This function stops the inverter output if an earth (ground) fault
overcurrent flows due to an earth (ground) fault which occurred in
Description the inverter's output (load) side. Use Pr. 249 "ground fault detection
at start" to set whether the protective function is to be activated or
not. (The 400V class always has the protective function.)
Check for an earth (ground) fault in the motor and connection
Check point
cable.
Corrective action Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.
Operation Panel Indication E. OHT FR-PU04 OH Fault

Name External thermal relay operation (Note 2)
If the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat
protection or the internally mounted temperature relay in the 5
Description motor switches on (contacts open), the inverter output is
stopped. If the relay contacts are reset automatically, the
inverter will not restart unless it is reset.
•Check for motor overheating.
Check point •Check that the value of "7" (OH signal) is set correctly in any
of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection).
Corrective action Reduce the load and operating duty.
Note: 2. This function is activated only when OH has been set to any of Pr. 180 to Pr.
183 (input terminal function selection).
189
Operation Panel Indication E. OLT FR-PU04 Stll Prev STP

Name Stall prevention
The running frequency has fallen to 0 by stall prevention
Description
activated. (OL while stall prevention is being activated.)
Corrective action Reduce the load weight.
Operation Panel Indication E.OPT FR-PU04 Option Fault

Name Option alarm
Stops the inverter output if a functional fault (e.g.
communication error of the communication option) occurs in
the communication option.
Description Stops the inverter output if the inverter station is disconnected
from the system in the NET mode. (Note 3)
Stops the inverter output if a setting error or connection
(connector) fault occurs during use of in-board option.
Check point Check that the communication cable is not open.
Corrective action Please contact your sales representative.
Note: 3. Only when the communication option is fitted to the three-phase 400V power
input model.
Operation Panel Indication E. PE FR-PU04 Corrupt Memory

Name Parameter storage device alarm
A fault occurred in parameters stored (example: E2PROM
Description
fault).
Check point Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Operation Panel Indication E. PUE FR-PU04 PU Leave Out

Name Parameter unit disconnection
This function stops the inverter output if communication
between the inverter and PU is suspended, e.g. the PU is
disconnected, when "2", "3", "16" or "17" was set in Pr. 75.
Description This function stops the inverter output if the number of
successive communication errors is greater than the number
of permissible retries when the Pr. 121 value is other than
"9999" for RS-485 communication from the PU connector.
• Check for loose fitting of the operation panel or FR-PU04.
Check point
• Check the Pr. 75 setting.
Corrective action Fit the operation panel and FR-PU04 securely.
190
Operation Panel Indication E. RET FR-PU04 Retry No Over

Name Retry count exceeded
If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of
Description
retries set, this function stops the inverter output.
Check point Find the cause of alarm occurrence.
Corrective action Eliminate the cause of the error preceding this error indication.
Operation Panel Indication E. CPU FR-PU04 CPU Fault

Name CPU error
If the arithmetic operation of the built-in CPU does not end
Description within a predetermined period, the inverter self-determines it
as an alarm and stops the output.
Check point ———
Operation Panel Indication E. 3 FR-PU04 Fault 3

Name Option fault
Also stops the inverter output if the dedicated option used in
Description the inverter results in setting error or connection (connector)
fault. (Note 4)
• Check that the function setting and operation of the option
are correct.
• Check that the communication option is plugged in the
Check point
connector securely.
• Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around
the inverter.
• Connect the communication option securely.
• Take measures against noises if there are devices producing
Corrective action
excess electrical noises around the inverter.
• Contact your sales representative.
Note: 4. Only when the communication option is fitted to the three-phase 400V power
input model.
E. 6 Fault 6
5
Operation Panel Indication FR-PU04
E. 7 Fault 7
Name CPU error
This function stops the inverter output if a communication error
Description
occurs in the built-in CPU. (400V class only)
Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around
Check point
the inverter.
• Take measures against noises if there are devices producing
Corrective action excess electrical noises around the inverter.
• Please contact your sales representative.
191
Operation Panel Indication E. P24 FR-PU04 Pr.24 alarm

Name 24VDC power output short circuit
When the 24VDC power output from the PC terminal is
shorted, this function shuts off the power output. At this time,
Description all external contact inputs switch off. The inverter cannot be
reset by entering the RES signal. To reset it, use the operation
panel or switch power off, then on again. (for 400V class only)
Check point Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal output.
Corrective action Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.
Operation Panel Indication E. LF FR-PU04 E. LF

Name Output phase failure protection
This function stops the inverter output if one of the three
Description phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side)
results in open phase.
• Check the wiring (Check the motor for a fault.)
Check point • Check that the capacity of the used motor is not smaller than
the inverter capacity.
• Wire the cables properly.
Corrective action • Check the setting of Pr. 251 "output phase failure protection
selection".
192
(2) Minor fault
The output is not shut off when the protective function is activated. You can make
parameter setting to output the minor fault signal. (Set "98" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
(output terminal function selection). Refer to page 163.)
Operation Panel Indication FN FR-PU04 Fan Failure
Name Fan fault
For the inverter which contains a cooling fan, FN appears on
the operation panel when the cooling fan stops due to a fault
Description
or operates differently from the setting of Pr. 244 "cooling fan
operation selection"
Check point Check the cooling fan for a fault.
Corrective action Replace the fan. (Refer to page 205.)
(3) Warnings
Operation Panel Indication OL FR-PU04 OL
Name Stall prevention (overcurrent)

During If a current of more than 150% (Note 5) of
acceleration the rated inverter current flows in the motor,
this function stops the increase in frequency
until the overload current reduces to
prevent the inverter from resulting in
overcurrent shut-off. When the overload
current has reduced below 150%, this
function increases the frequency again.
constant-speed the rated inverter current flows in the motor,
operation this function lowers the frequency until the
overload current reduces to prevent
Description
overcurrent shut-off. When the overload
current has reduced below 150%, this
function increases the frequency up to the
set value.
deceleration the rated inverter current flows in the motor,
this function stops the decrease in frequency
until the overload current reduces to prevent
the inverter from resulting in overcurrent 5
shut-off. When the overload current has
reduced below 150%, this function
decreases the frequency again.
The acceleration/deceleration time may change.
Increase the stall prevention operation level with Pr. 22 "stall
Corrective action
prevention operation level", or disable stall prevention with Pr.
156 "stall prevention operation selection".
Note:5. The stall prevention operation current can be set as desired. It is factory-set to
150%.
193
Operation Panel Indication oL FR-PU04 oL

Name Stall prevention (overvoltage)
During If the regenerative energy of the motor
deceleration increases too much to exceed the brake
capability, this function stops the decrease in
Description
frequency to prevent overvoltage shut-off. As
soon as the regenerative energy has reduced,
deceleration resumes.
Check point Check for sudden speed reduction.
The deceleration time may change. Increase the deceleration
Corrective action
time using Pr. 8 "deceleration time".
Operation Panel Indication PS FR-PU04 PS

Name PU stop
STOP
A stop made by pressing the RESET key of the PU has been set
Description
in Pr. 75 "PU stop selection".
STOP
Check for a stop made by pressing the RESET key of the
Check point
operation panel during external operation.
Corrective action Refer to page 121.
Operation Panel Indication Err.

This alarm appears if:
• The RES signal is on;
• You attempted to set any parameter value in the external
operation mode;
• You attempted to change the operation mode during
operation;
Description • You attempted to set any parameter value outside its setting
range.
• You attempted to set any parameter value during operation
(while signal STF or STR is ON).
• You attempted to set any parameter value while parameter
write is being inhibited in Pr. 77 "parameter write disable
selection".
Corrective action Perform operation correctly.
194
5.1.2 To know the operating status at the occurrence of alarm
When any alarm has occurred, the display automatically switches to the indication of the
corresponding protective function (error). By pressing the M O DE key at this point without
resetting the inverter, the display shows the output frequency. In this way, it is possible
to know the running frequency at the occurrence of the alarm. This also applies to the
current. After resetting, you can confirm the data in the alarm history (refer to page 67).
5.1.3 Correspondence between digital and actual characters

There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters
and the digital characters displayed on the operation panel:
Actual Display Actual Display Actual Display
0 A M
1 B N
2 C O
3 D o
4 E
P
5 F
S
6 G
T
7 H
U
8 I
V
9 J
r
L
-
5.1.4 Resetting the inverter

The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations. Note that the
electronic overcurrent protection's internal heat calculation value and the number of
retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter.
Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled. 5
Operation 1: ............Using the operation panel, press the STOP

RESET key to reset the inverter.
(This may only be performed when the inverter protective function
(major fault) is activated.)
Operation 2: ............Switch power off once, then switch it on again.
Operation 3: ............Switch on the reset signal (RES).
195
5.2 Troubleshooting
POINT: Check the corresponding areas. If the cause is still unknown, it is
recommended to initialize the parameters (return to factory settings), re-set
the required parameter values, and check again.
5.2.1 Motor remains stopped

1) Check the main circuit
Check that a proper power supply voltage is applied (operation panel display is
provided).
Check that the motor is connected properly.
Check that the conductor across P1-P is connected.
2) Check the input signals
Check that the start signal is input.
Check that both the forward and reverse rotation start signals are not input.
Check that the frequency setting signal is not zero.
Check that the AU signal is on when the frequency setting signal is 4 to 20mA.
Check that the output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is not on.
Check that the sink/source jumper connector is fitted securely.
3) Check the parameter settings

Check that the reverse rotation prevention (Pr. 78) is not selected.
Check that the operation mode (Pr. 79) setting is correct.
Check that the frequency setting command selection (Pr. 146) setting is correct.
Check that the bias and gain (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905, Pr. 922, Pr. 923) settings are
correct.
Check that the starting frequency (Pr. 13) setting is not greater than the
running frequency.
Check that various operational functions (such as three-speed operation),
especially the maximum frequency (Pr. 1), are not zero.
4) Check the load
Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check that the shaft is not locked.
5) Others
Check that the ALARM lamp is off.
Check that the operation panel display does not show an error (e.g. E.OC1).
Check that the Pr. 15 "jog frequency" setting is not lower than the Pr. 13
"starting frequency" value.
.
5.2.2 Motor rotates in opposite direction

Check that the phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is correct.
Check that the start signals (forward rotation, reverse rotation) are connected
properly.
196
5.2.3 Speed greatly differs from the setting

Check that the frequency setting signal is correct. (Measure the input signal level.)
Check that the following parameter settings are correct (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 19, Pr. 38,
Pr. 39, Pr. 245, Pr. 902 to Pr. 905).
Check that the input signal lines are not affected by external noise. (Use shielded
cables)
5.2.4 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth

Check that the acceleration and deceleration time settings are not too short.
Check that the torque boost setting is not too large to activate the stall prevention
function.
5.2.5 Motor current is large

Check that the torque boost setting is not too large.
5.2.6 Speed does not increase

Check that the maximum frequency setting is correct.
Check that the load is not too heavy. (In agitators, etc., load may become heavier
in winter.)
Check that the torque boost setting is not too large to activate the stall prevention
function.
Check that the brake resistor is not connected to terminals P-P1 or terminals P1-
PR accidentally.
5.2.7 Speed varies during operation

When slip compensation is selected, the output frequency varies with load
fluctuation between 0 and 2Hz. This is a normal operation and is not a fault.
1) Inspection of load
Check that the load is not varying.
2) Inspection of input signal
Check that the frequency setting signal is not varying.
Check that the frequency setting signal is not affected by noise. 5
Check that a malfunction does not occur due to an undesirable current when
the transistor output unit is connected, for example. (Refer to page 26.)
3) Others
Check that the setting of the applied motor capacity (Pr. 80) is correct for the
inverter capacities in general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
Check that the wiring length is within 30m in general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control.
Check that the wiring length is correct in V/F control.
197
5.2.8 Operation mode is not changed properly

If the operation mode does not change correctly, check the following:
1) External input signal ............... Check that the STF or STR signal is off.
When it is on, the operation mode cannot be
changed.
2) Parameter setting .................. Check the Pr. 79 setting.
When the setting of Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection" is "0", switching input power on
places the inverter in the external operation
mode. By pressing the M ODE key twice and
pressing the key, the external operation
mode changes to the PU operation mode. For
any other setting (1 to 8), the operation mode is
limited according to the setting.
5.2.9 Operation panel display is not operating

Make sure that the operation panel is connected securely with the inverter.
Check for a short circuit across terminals PC-SD.
Check that the jumper across terminals P-P1 is fitted securely.
5.2.10 POWER lamp is not lit

(Check the power lamp after removing the operation panel.)
Make sure that the wiring and installation are correct.
5.2.11 Parameter write cannot be performed

Make sure that operation is not being performed (signal STF or STR is not ON).
Make sure that you pressed the SET key ( WRITE key) for longer than 1.5 s.
Make sure that you are not attempting to set the parameter outside the setting
range.
Make sure that you are not attempting to set the parameter in the external
operation mode.
(Set "2" in Pr. 77 when performing parameter setting in the external operation
mode. (Refer to page 123))
Check Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection".
198
CHAPTER 6
MAINTENANCE/
INSPECTION
This chapter explains the "maintenance/inspection" of this
product.
Chapter 1
6.1 Precautions for Maintenance and

Inspection ................................................ 200
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
199
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
6.1 Precautions for Maintenance and

Inspection
The transistorized inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices.
Daily inspection must be performed to prevent any fault from occurring due to adverse
influence by the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust, dirt and
vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.
6.1.1 Precautions for maintenance and inspection
For some short time after the power is switched off, a high voltage remains in the
smoothing capacitor. Therefore, when more than 10 minutes have elapsed after power-
off, make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P (+) - N (–) of the
inverter is 30VDC or less using a meter, etc. Then, access the inverter for inspection.
6.1.2 Check items
(1) Daily inspection
• Check the following:
1) Motor operation fault
2) Improper installation environment
3) Cooling system fault
4) Unusual vibration and noise
5) Unusual overheating and discoloration
• During operation, check the inverter input voltages using a meter.
(2) Cleaning
Always run the inverter in a clean state.
When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral
detergent or ethanol.
Note: Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they
will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off.
Do not use detergent or alcohol to clean the display and other sections of the
operation panel as these sections may deform.
6.1.3 Periodic inspection
Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection.
1) Cooling system:............. Clean the air filter, etc.
2) Screws and bolts: .......... These parts may become loose due to vibration,
temperature changes, etc. Check that they are tightened
securely and retighten as necessary.
3) Conductors and insulating materials: Check for corrosion and damage.
4) Insulation resistance: Measure.
5) Cooling fan, smoothing capacitor: Check and change if necessary.
200
6.1.4 Insulation resistance test using megger
1) Before performing the insulation resistance test using a megger on the external
circuit, disconnect the cables from all terminals of the inverter so that the test
voltage is not applied to the inverter.
2) For the continuity test of the control circuit, use a meter (high resistance range) and
do not use the megger or buzzer.
3) For the inverter, conduct the insulation resistance test on the main circuit only as
shown below and do not perform the test on the control circuit. (Use a 500VDC
megger.)
Motor
R (L1) Inverter U
Power supply S (L2) V IM
T (L3) W
500VDC
megger
Earth(ground) terminal
6.1.5 Pressure test

Do not conduct a pressure test. The inverter's main circuit uses semiconductors, which
may deteriorate if a pressure test is made.
201
6.1.6 Daily and periodic inspection
Interval
Customer's
Inspection
Periodic*
Area of
check
Inspection
Daily
Description Method Criterion Instrument

2 years
1 year
Item
Ambient
temperature:
Check ambient -10°C to +50°C, Thermo-
Surrounding temperature, non-freezing. meter,
{ Refer to page 14.
environment humidity, dust, dirt, Ambient hygrometer,
etc. humidity: 90% recorder
or less, non-
General
condensing.
Check for unusual Visual and auditory
Overall unit { No fault.
vibration and noise. checks.
Within
Power Check that main Measure voltage permissible AC Meter,
across inverter (DC) voltage
supply circuit voltage is { digital
terminals R-S-T (L1- fluctuation
voltage normal. multimeter
L2-L3). (Refer to page
214)
(1) Check with { (1) Disconnect all (1) 5MΩ or
megger (across cables from more.
main circuit inverter and
terminals and measure across
earth (ground) terminals R (L1),
terminal). S (L2), T (L3), U,
V, W and earth 500VDC
General (2) Check for loose {
screws and bolts. (ground) terminal (2), (3) No fault. class megger
with megger.
(3) Check for { (2) Retighten.
overheat on each (3) Visual check.
part.
(4) Clean. {
(1) Check conductors { (1), (2) Visual check. (1), (2) No
for distortion. fault.
Conductors,
cables (2) Check cable {
sheaths for
Main circuit
breakage.
Terminal
Check for damage. { Visual check No fault
block
Disconnect cables
from inverter and
measure across
Inverter
terminals R, S, T-P,
module Check resistance Refer to page
Converter across terminals. { N (L1, L2, L3 - +, –), 204. Analog meter
and across U, V, W -
module
P (+), N (–) with a
meter with a 100Ω
range.
(1) Check for liquid { (1), (2) Visual check. (1), (2) No
leakage. fault.
(2) Check for safety {
valve projection
Smoothing Capacity
and bulge.
capacitor meter
(3) Measure { (3) Measure with (3) 85% or
electrostatic capacity meter. more of
capacity. rated
capacity.
202
Interval
Customer's
Inspection
Periodic*
Area of
check
Inspection
Description Daily Method Criterion Instrument
2 years
1 year
Item
(1) Check for { (1) Auditory check. (1) No fault.

chatter during
circuit
operation.
Main
Relay
(2) Check for rough { (2) Visual check. (2) No fault.
surface on
contacts.
(1) Check balance { (1) Measure (1) Phase-to-
of output voltage across phase
voltages across inverter output voltage
phases with terminals U-V- balance
Protective circuit
inverter operated W. within 4V

Control circuit
independently. (8V) for Digital

Operation (2) Perform 200V multimeter,
check sequence (400V). rectifier type
protective { (2) Simulate (2) Fault must voltmeter
operation test to connection of occur
make sure there inverter because of
is no fault in protective sequence.
protective or circuit output
display circuits. terminals.
(1) Check for { (1) Turn by hand No unusual
Cooling
unusual vibration with power off. vibration and

system
Cooling fan and noise. unusual noise.

(2) Check for loose { (2) Visual check.
connection.
(1) Check for LED { (1) Lamps indicate (1) Check that
lamp blown. indicator lamps lamps are
Display on panel. lit.
Display
(2) Clean. { (2) Clean with rag.

Check that reading { Check reading of Must satisfy Voltmeter,
is normal. meters on panel. specified and ammeter,
Meter etc.
management
values.
(1) Check for { (1) Auditory, (1), (2) No
unusual vibration sensory, visual fault.
and noise. checks.
General (2) Check for { (2) Check for
unusual odor. unusual odor
Motor
due to
overheat,
damage, etc.
Check with megger { Disconnect cables 5MΩ or more. 500V
Insulation (across terminals from U, V, W, megger
resistance and earth (ground) including motor
terminal). cables.
Note: The values within the parentheses are for the 400V class.
* For periodic inspection, contact you nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
203
z Checking the inverter and converter modules
<Preparation>
(1) Disconnect the external power supply cables (R, S, T (L1, L2, L3)) and motor cables
(U, V, W).
(2) Prepare a meter. (Use 100Ω range.)
<Checking method>
Change the polarity of the meter alternately at the inverter terminals R (L1), S (L2),
T (L3), U, V, W, P (+) and N (–), and check for continuity.
Note: 1. Before measurement, check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged.
2. At the time of discontinuity, the measured value is almost ∞. When there is
an instantaneous continuity, due to the smoothing capacitor the tester may
not indicate ∞. At the time of continuity, the measured value is several to
several ten's-of ohms depending on the number of modules, number of
parallel modules, circuit tester type, etc. If all measured values are almost
the same, the modules are without fault.
<Module device numbers and terminals to be checked>

Tester Polarity Measured Tester Polarity Measured
Value Value
R (L1) P (+) Discontinuity R (L1) N (–) Continuity
D1 D4
P (+) R (L1) Continuity N (–) R (L1) Discontinuity
Converter
module
S (L2) P (+) Discontinuity S (L2) N (–) Continuity

D2 D5
P (+) S (L2) Continuity N (–) S (L2) Discontinuity
T (L3) P (+) Discontinuity T (L3) N (–) Continuity
D3 D6
P (+) T (L3) Continuity N (–) T (L3) Discontinuity
U P (+) Discontinuity U N (–) Continuity
Inverter module
TR1 TR4
P (+) U Continuity N (–) U Discontinuity
V P (+) Discontinuity V N (–) Continuity
TR3 TR6
P (+) V Continuity N (–) V Discontinuity
W P (+) Discontinuity W N (–) Continuity
TR5 TR2
P (+) W Continuity N (–) W Discontinuity
(Assumes the use of an analog meter.)
Converter module P (+) Inverter module
TR1 TR3 TR5
D1 D2 D3
R (L1) U
C
S (L2) V
T (L3) W
D4 D5 D6
TR4 TR6 TR2
N (-)
Note: The FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.75K and FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K do not have T (L3),
D3 and D6.
204
6.1.7 Replacement of parts
The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices.
The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structural or physical
characteristics, leading to reduced performance or failure of the inverter. For preventive
maintenance, the parts must be changed periodically.
Standard
Part Name Description
Replacement Interval
Cooling fan 2 to 3 years Replace (as required)
Smoothing capacitor in main circuit 8 years * Replace (as required)
Replace the board
Smoothing capacitor on control board 8 years *
(as required).
* The design life of electrolytic capacitor is about eight years (50000h) if used for 20
hours a day and 300 days a year in the average yearly ambient temperature of 35°C.
Note: For part replacement, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.
(1) Cooling fan

The cooling fan cools heat-generating parts such as the main circuit semiconductor
devices. The life of the cooling fan bearing is usually 10,000 to 35,000 hours. Hence,
the cooling fan must be changed every 2 to 3 years if the inverter is run continuously.
When unusual noise and/or vibration is noticed during inspection, the cooling fan must
be replaced immediately. When you need to change the cooling fan, contact the nearest
Mitsubishi FA Center.
Inverter Model No. Fan Type

FR-E520-0.75K MMF-04C24DS BKO-CA1382H01
FR-E520-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K
MMF-06D24DS BKO-C2461H07
FR-E520S-0.75K
FR-E520-5.5K, 7.5K MMF-06D24ES BKO-CA1027H08
FR-E540-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K MMF-06D24ES-FC4 BKO-CA1027H09
FR-E540-5.5K, 7.5K MMF-06D24ES-FC5 BKO-CA1027H10
205
z Removal
(For the FR-E520-0.75K to 3.7K, FR-E520S- 0.75K)
1) Remove the wiring cover. (Refer to page 8.)
2) Unplug the fan connector.
The cooling fan is plugged into the cooling fan
connector beside the inverter terminal block.
Unplug the connector and separate the inverter
from the cooling fan.
3) Remove the cooling fan cover.
Push the cover in the direction of arrow and pull it
down.
4) Remove the cooling fan and cooling fan cover.
The cooling fan is secured by the fixing hooks.
Disengage the fixing catches to remove the
cooling fan and cooling fan cover.
(For the FR-E520-5.5K and 7.5K)

1) Remove the cooling fan cover from the inverter.
(Push the cover in the direction of arrow A and pull
it down in the direction of B.)
Take care of connection cables of the cooling fan
and inverter. A
B A
2) Remove the cooling fan connectors.

The cooling fan is connected to the inverter with a
connector.
Slide the connector cover out of the way to remove
the connector.
3) Remove the cooling fan.

The cooling fan is secured by the fixing hooks.
Disengage the fixing hooks to remove the cooling
fan and cooling fan cover.
206

1) Remove the front cover (Refer
to page 6).
2) Unplug the fan connector.
The cooling fan is connected to
the cooling fan connector
beside the main circuit terminal
block of the inverter.
Unplug the connector.
Fan connector
3) Remove the inverter and

cooling fan.
Push in the direction of arrow A
and pull out in the direction of
arrow B.
A B
A
4) Remove the cooling fan and

cooing fan cover.
The cooling fan is secured by
the fixing hooks. Cooling fan
You can remove the cooling
fan and cooling fan cover by
disengaging the fixing hooks.
Cooling fan cover
207
z Reinstallation
(For the FR-E520-0.75K to 7.5K, FR-E520S-0.75K)
1) After confirming the orientation of the fan,
reinstall the fan to the cover so that the arrow
on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces in the
opposite direction of the fan cover. AIR FLOW
Note: If the air flow is set in the wrong

direction, the inverter life can be shorter.
2) Reinstall the fan cover to the inverter.
Run the cable through the wiring groove to
prevent it from being caught between the (For 5.5K, 7.5K)
chassis and cover.
3) Reconnect the cable to the connector.
4) Reinstall the wiring cover.
*Wire the cables using care so that they

are not caught by the cooling fan.
208

1) After confirming the orientation of
the fan, reinstall the fan to the AIR FLOW
cover so that the arrow on the left
of "AIR FLOW" faces in the
opposite direction of the fan cover.
Note: If the air flow is set in the
wrong direction, the inverter
life can be shorter.
2) Reinstall the fan cover to the
inverter.
Wiring groove
Run the cable through the wiring
groove to prevent it from being
caught between the chassis and
cover.
3) Reconnect the cable to the

connector.
4) Reinstall the front cover.

Fan connector
(2) Smoothing capacitors

A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing the DC in the
main circuit, and an aluminum electrolytic capacitor is also used for stabilizing the
control power in the control circuit.
Their characteristics are adversely affected by ripple current, etc. When the inverter is operated
in an ordinary, air-conditioned environment, change the capacitors about every 5 years. When
5 years have elapsed, the capacitors will deteriorate more rapidly. Check the capacitors at
least every year (less than six months if the life will be expired soon). Check the following:
1) Case (side faces and bottom face for expansion)
2) Sealing plate (for remarkable warp and extreme crack)
3) Appearance, external cracks, discoloration, leakage. 6
When the measured capacitance of the capacitor has reduced below 80% of the
rating, replace the capacitor.
The capacitor life alarm is output to give an indication of replacement time. (Refer to
page 169.)
209
6.1.8 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers
z Measurement of voltages and currents
Since the voltages and currents on the inverter power supply and output sides include
harmonics, accurate measurement depends on the instruments used and circuits
measured.
When instruments for commercial frequency are used for measurement, measure the
following circuits using the instruments given on the next page.
Three-phase 200V
power input
Three-phase 400V
power input
Input Output
voltage voltage
Input
Output
current
current
Single-phase 100V
power input
Single-phase 200V
power input
Inverter
Ar W11 R (L1) U Au W21
Vr Vu
3-phase As W12 S (L2) V Av To motor
power Vv
Vs
At W13 T (L3) W Aw W22
(Note 2) Vt Vw
P (+) N (-) :Moving-iron type
:Electrodynamometer type
V :Moving-coil type
+ − :Rectifier type
Instrument types
Typical Measuring Points and Instruments
Note: 1. Use FFT (Fast Fourier Transforms) to measure the output voltage accurately.
It cannot be measured accurately with a meter or general instrument.
2. For FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.75K and FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K do not use At,
As, Vt, Vs, W12 and W13.
210
Measuring Points and Instruments
Remarks
Item Measuring Point Measuring Instrument
(Reference Measured Value)
Power supply Is the commercial power supply within
Across R-S (L1-L2 ), S-T (L2- Moving-iron type AC
voltage L3) and T-R (L3-L1) voltmeter permissible variation of AC voltage
(V1) (Refer to page 214)
Power supply side R, S and T line currents Moving-iron type AC
current
(L1, L2 and L3 line currents) ammeter
(I1)
Power supply side At R (L1), S (L2) and T (L3),
Electrodynamic type P1 = W11 + W12 + W13
power and across R-S (L1-L2), S-T
(P1) (L2-L3) and T-R (L3-L1) single-phase wattmeter (3-wattmeter method)
Calculate after measuring power supply voltage, power supply side current and power supply side
Power supply side power.
power factor [For three-phase power supply] [For single-phase power supply]
(Pf1) P1 P1
Pf1= 100% Pf1= 100%
3V I1 V1 I1
Output side (Note 1) Difference between phases is within
voltage Across U-V, V-W and W-U (Cannot be measured by
±1% of maximum output voltage.
(V2) moving-iron type)
Output side Moving-iron type AC Current should be equal to or less than
current U, V and W line currents ammeter rated inverter current.Difference
(I2) (Note 2) between phases is 10% or lower.
P2 = W21 + W22
Output side power At U, V and W, and across U- Electrodynamic type 2-wattmeter method (or 3-wattmeter
(P2) V and V-W single-phase wattmeter
method)
Calculate in similar manner to power supply side power factor.
Output side power P2
factor (Pf2) Pf2= 100%
3V2 I2
Moving-coil type Inverter LED display is lit. 1.35 × V1
Converter output Across P-N (+ - –) Maximum 380V (760V) during
(such as tester)
regenerative operation
Frequency setting Across 2 (positive)-5 0 to 5V/0 to 10VDC
common.
"5" is
signal Across 4 (positive)-5 4 to 20mADC

Frequency setting
Across 10 (positive)-5 5VDC
power supply
Approximately 5VDC at
maximum frequency (without
frequency meter)
Moving-coil type
(Meter, etc. may be used) T1
SD is common.
(Internal resistance:
50Ω or larger) 8VDC
Frequency meter
Across FM (positive)-SD
signal
T2
Pulse width T1:
Adjusted with Pr. 900
Pulse cycle T2:
Set with Pr. 55
(Valid for frequency monitoring
only)
Start signal Across STF, STR, RH, RM,
common.
Moving-coil type
Select signal RL, MRS, RES-SD
SD is
(Meter, etc. may be used) 20 to 30VDC when open.ON

Reset Across RES (positive)-SD (Internal resistance: voltage: 1V or less
Output stop Across MRS (positive)-SD 50kΩ or larger)
Continuity check
Across A-C Moving-coil type <Normal> <Fault>
Alarm signal
Across B-C (such as a meter) Across A-C: Discontinuity Continuity
Across B-C: Continuity Discontinuity
6
Note: 1. Use FFT to measure the output voltage accurately. It can not be measured accurately with a meter
or general instrumentation.
2. If the carrier frequency exceeds 5kHz, do not use this instrument since using it may increase eddy-
current loss produced in metal parts inside the instrument, leading to burnout.
In this case, use an approximate effective value type instrument.
*The value within the parentheses is for the 400V class.
211
MEMO
212
CHAPTER 7
SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter explains the "protective functions" of this product.
Chapter 1
7.1 Standard Specifications ........................... 214
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
213
SPECIFICATIONS
7.1 Standard Specifications

7.1.1 Model specifications
(1) 3-phase 200V power supply
Type FR-E520- K(C) 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5
(Note 8)
Applicable motor capacity
0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5
(kW) (Note 1)
Rated capacity (kVA) 0.3 0.6 1.2 2.0 3.2 4.4 7.0 9.5 13.1
(Note 2)
Rated current (A) 0.8 1.5 3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33
Output
(Note 6) (0.8) (1.4) (2.5) (4.1) (7) (10) (16.5) (23) (31)
Overload capacity 150% 60s 200% 0.5s
(Note 3) (inverse-time characteristics)
Voltage (Note 4) Three phase, 200V to 240V 50Hz/60Hz
Rated input AC (DC) Three phase, 200V to 240V 50Hz/60Hz
voltage, frequency (280VDC, Note 7)
Power supply
Permissible AC (DC) 170 to 264V 50Hz/60Hz

voltage fluctuation (252 to 310VDC, Note 7)
Permissible frequency
±5%
fluctuation
Power supply system
0.4 0.8 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17
capacity (kVA)(Note 5)
Protective structure
Enclosed type (IP20), IP40 for totally enclosed structure series
(JEM1030)
Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling
Approximate weight (kg) 0.6 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.7 1.7 2.2 4.4 4.9
Note: 1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable
when a Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor is used.
2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 230V.
3. The overload capacity indicated in % is the ratio of the overload current to the
inverter's rated current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter and motor
to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
4. The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The
maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged
at about that of the power supply.
5. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side
inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables).
6. The rated output current in the parentheses applies when low acoustic noise
operation is to be performed at the ambient temperature higher than
40°C(30°C for the totally enclosed structure) with the Pr. 72 (PWM frequency
selection) value set to 2kHz or higher.
7. When using a DC power supply
(1) The guideline for the power supply voltage fluctuation range is 280VDC
±10%, and usually use the power supply at or below 300VDC.
(2) When DC power is switched on, a larger inrush current flows than in AC
power. The number of power-on times should be minimized.
(3) 300VDC must be reserved to make the torque characteristic equal to
when AC power supply is used.
8. The type code of the dirt-protection structure series ends with C.
214
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) 3-phase 400V power supply
Type FR-E540- K (C) (Note 7) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5
Applicable motor capacity (kW)
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5
(Note 1)
Rated capacity (kVA) (Note 2) 1.2 2.0 3.0 4.6 7.2 9.1 13.0
1.6 2.6 4.0 6.0 9.5
Rated current (A) (Note 6) 12 17
Output
(1.4) (2.2) (3.8) (5.4) (8.7)

150% 60s 200% 0.5s
Overload capacity (Note 3)
(inverse-time characteristics)
Voltage (Note 4) Three phase, 380V to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
Rated input AC voltage,
Three phase, 380V to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
frequency
Power supply
Permissible AC voltage
325V to 528V 50Hz/60Hz
fluctuation
±5%
fluctuation
Power supply system capacity
1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9.5 12 17
(kVA) (Note 5)
Enclosed type (IP20), IP40 for totally enclosed structure
Protective structure (JEM1030)
series
Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling
Approximate weight (kg) 1.9 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.1 3.8 3.8
inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables).
operation is to be performed at the ambient temperature higher than 40°C
(30°C for the totally enclosed structure) with the Pr. 72 (PWM frequency
selection) value set to 2kHz or higher.
7. The type code of the dirt-protection structure series ends with C.
7
215
SPECIFICATIONS
(3) Single-phase 200V power supply
Type FR-E520S- K 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75
0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75
(Note 1)
Rated capacity (kVA) (Note 2) 0.3 0.6 1.2 2.0
Rated output current (A) 0.8 1.5 3.0 5.0
Output
(Note 6) (0.8) (1.4) (2.5) (4.1)

Overload capacity (Note 3) 150% 60s 200% 0.5s (inverse-time characteristics)
Rated output voltage (Note 4) Three phase, 200V to 240V 50Hz/60Hz
Single phase, 200V to 240V 50Hz/60Hz
frequency
Power supply
Single phase, 170 to 264V 50Hz/60Hz
fluctuation
Within ±5%
fluctuation
Power supply capacity (kVA)
0.5 0.9 1.5 2.5
(Note 5)
Protective structure (JEM1030) Enclosed type (IP20)
Forced air
Cooling system Self-cooling
cooling
Approximate weight (kg) 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.7
Normally, the rated current (at 50Hz) of the motor applied should not exceed
the rated current.
inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter
and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables). Prepare
the power supply capacity which is not less than the indicated.
operation is to be performed at the ambient temperature higher than 40°C with
the Pr. 72 (PWM frequency selection) value set to 2kHz or higher.
216
SPECIFICATIONS
(4) Single-phase 100V power supply
Type FR-E510W- K 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75
0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75
(Note 1)
Rated capacity (kVA) (Note 2) 0.3 0.6 1.2 2
Rated output current (A) 0.8 1.5 3.0 5.0
Output
(Note 7) (0.8) (1.4) (2.5) (4.1)

Overload capacity (Note 3) 150% 60s 200% 0.5s (inverse-time characteristics)
Rated output voltage (Note 4) Three phase, 200V to 230V 50Hz/60Hz (Note 4, 8)
Single phase, 100V to 115V 50Hz/60Hz
frequency
Power supply
Single phase, 90 to 132V 50Hz/60Hz
fluctuation
Within ±5%
fluctuation
Power supply capacity (kVA)
0.5 0.9 1.5 2.5
(Note 5)
Protective structure (JEM1030) Enclosed type (IP20)
Cooling system Self-cooling
Approximate weight (kg) 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.7
when the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor is used.
Normally, the rated current (at 50Hz) of the motor applied should not exceed
the rated current.
4. For single-phase 100V power input, the output voltage provided cannot be
twice or more than the power supply voltage. The pulse voltage value of the
inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about that of the power
supply.
inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables). Prepare
the power supply capacity which is not less than the indicated.
6. Load applied to the motor will reduce the output voltage about 10 to 15%.
When using a general-purpose motor, it must be used under reduced load.
operation is to be performed at the ambient temperature higher than 40°C with
the Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" value set to not less than 2kHz.
8. For single-phase 100V power input, the application of motor load reduces the
output voltage about 10 to 15%. Therefore, the load must be reduced when a
general-purpose motor is used.
7
217
SPECIFICATIONS
7.1.2 Common specifications
Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control can be

Control system selected. V/F control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control
can be selected.
Output frequency range 0.2 to 400Hz (starting frequency variable between 0 and 60Hz)
Across terminals 2-5: 1/500 of maximum set frequency (5VDC input),
1/1000 (10VDC, 4-20mADC input), 1/256 (when operation panel
Frequency Analog input potentiometer is used)
setting
Frequency setting potentiometer: 1/256 of maximum set frequency
resolution
0.01Hz (less than 100Hz), 0.1Hz (100Hz or more) when digital setting
Digital input
is made using the operation panel
Analog input Within ±0.5% of maximum output frequency (25°C ±10°C)
Frequency
accuracy Within 0.01% of set output frequency when setting is made from
Digital input
operation panel.
Base frequency set as required between 0 and 400Hz. Constant
Voltage/frequency characteristic
torque or variable torque pattern can be selected.
150% or more (at 1Hz), 200% or more (at 3Hz) when general-purpose
Starting torque
magnetic flux vector control or slip compensation is selected
Torque boost Manual torque boost, 0 to 30% may be set.
Acceleration/deceleration time 0.01, 0.1 to 3600 s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually),
setting linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode can be selected.
Regenerative 0.1K, 0.2K ... 150%, 0.4K, 0.75K ... 100%,
(Note 3) 1.5K ... 50%, 2.2K, 3.7K, 5.5K, 7.5K ... 20%
Braking torque
DC injection Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10 s),
brake operation voltage (0 to 30%) variable
Control specifications
Current stall prevention Operation current level can be set (0 to 200% variable), presence or
operation level absence can be selected.
Voltage stall prevention
Operation level is fixed, presence or absence can be selected.
operation level
High-response current limit level Operation level is fixed, presence or absence can be selected.
Frequency Analog input 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC, 4 to 20mADC, built-in frequency setting
setting potentiometer.
signal Digital input Entered from operation panel.
Forward rotation and reverse rotation, start signal self-holding input
Start signal
(3-wire input) selectable.
Used to reset alarm output provided when protective function is
Alarm reset
activated.
Up to 15 speeds can be selected. (Each speed can be
Multi-speed selection set between 0 and 400Hz, running speed can be
Input signals
changed during operation from the operation panel.)

Used to select second functions (acceleration time,
Second function selection deceleration time, torque boost, base frequency,
electronic overcurrent protection).
Instantaneous shut-off of inverter output (frequency, Use
Output stop
voltage). Pr. 180 to
Used to select input of frequency setting signal 4 to Pr. 183 for
Current input selection
20mADC (terminal 4). selection.
Thermal relay contact input for use when the inverter is
External thermal relay input
stopped by the external thermal relay.
PU operation-external Used to switch between PU operation and external
operation switchover operation from outside the inverter.
V/F-general-purpose Used to switch between V/F control and general-purpose
magnetic flux switching magnetic flux vector control from outside the inverter.
218
SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation,
external thermal relay input selection, automatic restart operation after
Operation functions instantaneous power failure, forward/reverse rotation prevention, slip
Control specifications
compensation, operation mode selection, offline auto tuning function,

PID control, computer link operation (RS-485)
2 open collector output signals can be selected from inverter running,
up to frequency, frequency detection, overload alarm, zero current
Output signals
detection, output current detection, PID upper limit, PID lower limit, PID
Operating status
forward/reverse rotation, operation ready, capacitor life alarm, minor
fault and alarm, and 1 contact output (230VAC 0.3A, 30VDC 0.3A) can
be selected.
1 signal can be selected from output frequency, output current and
For meter
output voltage. Pulse train output (1440 pulses/s/full scale).
Operating
Output voltage, output current, set frequency, running.
Operation panel status
Display
display Alarm Alarm definition is displayed when protective function is activated. 4

definition alarm definitions are stored.
LED display Power application (POWER), Alarm (ALARM)
Overcurrent shut-off (during acceleration, deceleration, constant
speed), regenerative overvoltage shut-off, undervoltage (Note 1),
instantaneous power failure (Note 1), overload shut-off (electronic
overcurrent protection), brake transistor alarm, output short circuit, stall
prevention, brake resistor overheat protection, heatsink overheat, fan
Protective/alarm functions
failure (Note 4), parameter error, PU disconnection, output phase
failure protection, earth (ground) fault overcurrent protection (400V
class), starting-time earth (ground) fault overcurrent protection (other
than 400V class), option alarm (400V class), 24VDC power supply
short circuit (400V class).
-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
Ambient temperature
(-10°C to +40°C for totally-enclosed structure feature)
Environment
Ambient humidity 90%RH or less (non-condensing)

Storage temperature (Note 2) -20°C to +65°C
Ambience Indoors (no corrosive and flammable gases, oil mist, dust and dirt.)
Altitude, vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard operation.
Note: 1. When undervoltage or instantaneous power failure has occurred, alarm

display or alarm output is not provided but the inverter itself is protected.
Overcurrent, regenerative overvoltage or other protection may be activated
at power restoration according to the operating status (load size, etc.)
2. Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc.
3. The braking torque indicated is a short-duration average torque (which
varies with motor loss) when the motor alone is decelerated from 60Hz in
the shortest time and is not a continuous regenerative torque. When the
motor is decelerated from the frequency higher than the base frequency, the
average deceleration torque will reduce. Since the inverter does not contain
a brake resistor, use the optional brake resistor when regenerative energy is
large. (The optional brake resistor cannot be used with 0.1K and 0.2K.) A
brake unit (BU) may also be used.
4. Not provided for the FR-E540-0.4K, 0.75K, FR-E520(S)-0.1K to 0.4K and
FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K which are not equipped with a cooling fan.
7
219
SPECIFICATIONS
7.1.3 Outline drawings
(1) 200V class, 100V class
z FR-E520-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K, 0.75K
z FR-E520S-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K
z FR-E510W-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K
Frequency setting potentiometer

φ5 hole
knob is removable.
5
STOP
RUN RESET
MIN MAX
118
128
5
5 4
6 56 6 11 D2 D1
68 7 D
Inverter Type D D1 D2
FR-E520-0.1K 76 10 55
FR-E520-0.2K 76 10 55
FR-E520-0.4K 108 42 55
FR-E520-0.75K 128 62 55
Wiring holes FR-E520S-0.1K 76 10 55
FR-E520S-0.2K 76 10 55
FR-E520S-0.4K 138 42 85
FR-E510W-0.1K 76 10 55
FR-E510W-0.2K 106 10 85
FR-E510W-0.4K 138 42 85
Note: FR-E520-0.75K is provided with
cooling fan.
(Unit: mm)
220
SPECIFICATIONS
z FR-E520-1.5K, 2.2K
z FR-E520S-0.75K
z FR-E510W-0.75K

knob is removable.
5
2-φ5 hole
STOP
RUN
RESET
MIN MAX
118
128
5
5 D3
29 68 11 11 D2 D1
6 96 6 7 D
108
Wiring holes
Inverter Type D D1 D2 D3
FR-E520-1.5K, 2.2K 131 65 55 8
FR-E520S-0.75K 131 65 55 8
FR-E510W-0.75K 155 59 85 5
Note: FR-E510W-0.75K is not equipped with a
Cooling fan
cooling fan.
(Unit: mm)
7
221
SPECIFICATIONS
z FR-E520-3.7K

2-φ5 hole knob is removable.
5
STOP
RUN
RESET
MIN MAX
118
128
5
5
5
82.5 68 19.5 11 55 72
55.5 114.5 7 138
6 158 6
170
Wiring holes
Cooling fan
(Unit: mm)
222
SPECIFICATIONS
z FR-E520-5.5K, 7.5K
2-φ6 hole Frequency setting potentiometer

Knob is removable.
RUN
ST OP
RESET
8
MIN MAX
244
260
8
6 96 68 16 11 10
8 164 8 112.5 57.5
180 7 170
Wiring holes
Cooling fan
(Unit: mm)
7
223
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) 400V class
zFR-E540-0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K
2-φ5 hole
6
STOP
RUN
RESET
MIN MAX
138
150
11 61 D1
6
5
7 D
6 128 6
140
Inverter Type D D1
FR-E540-0.4K, 0.75K 116 44
FR-E540-1.5K to 3.7K 136 64
Cooling fan Note: There is no cooling fan in the FR-
E540-0.4K and 0.75K
(Unit: mm)
224
SPECIFICATIONS
z FR-E540-5.5K, 7.5K
2-φ5 hole
6
STOP
RUN
RESET
MIN MAX
138
150
11 64 73
6
5
6 208 6 7 148
220
Cooling fan
(Unit: mm)
7
225
MEMO
226
APPENDIX
This chapter provides "supplementary information" for use of this

product.
APPENDIX 1 Instruction Code List ................. 228

APPENDIX 2 When using the communication
option. (400V class only) .......... 232
227
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 1 Instruction Code List

Instruction Link Parameter
Func- Parameter Code Extension Setting
Name
tion Number (Instruction Code
Read Write
7F/FF)
0 Torque boost 00 80 0
1 Maximum frequency 01 81 0
2 Minimum frequency 02 82 0
Basic functions
3 Base frequency 03 83 0
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 04 84 0
5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 05 85 0
6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 06 86 0
7 Acceleration time 07 87 0
8 Deceleration time 08 88 0
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay 09 89 0
10 DC injection brake operation frequency 0A 8A 0
11 DC injection brake operation time 0B 8B 0
12 DC injection brake voltage 0C 8C 0
13 Starting frequency 0D 8D 0
14 Load pattern selection 0E 8E 0
15 Jog frequency 0F 8F 0
16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time 10 90 0
18 High-speed maximum frequency 12 92 0
19 Base frequency voltage 13 93 0
20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency 14 94 0
21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments 15 95 0

22 Stall prevention operation level 16 96 0
Stall prevention operation level compensation factor
23 17 97 0
at double speed
24 Multi-speed setting (speed 4) 18 98 0
25 Multi-speed setting (speed 5) 19 99 0
26 Multi-speed setting (speed 6) 1A 9A 0
27 Multi-speed setting (speed 7) 1B 9B 0
29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern 1D 9D 0
30 Regenerative function selection 1E 9E 0
31 Frequency jump 1A 1F 9F 0
32 Frequency jump 1B 20 A0 0
33 Frequency jump 2A 21 A1 0
35 Frequency jump 3A 23 A3 0
37 Speed display 25 A5 0
38 Frequency at 5V (10V) input 26 A6 0
39 Frequency at 20mA input 27 A7 0
41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 29 A9 0
functions
terminal
Output
42 Output frequency detection 2A AA 0

43 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation 2B AB 0
44 Second acceleration/deceleration time 2C AC 0
functions
45 Second deceleration time 2D AD 0

Second
46 Second torque boost 2E AE 0

47 Second V/F (base frequency) 2F AF 0
48 Second electronic thermal O/L relay 30 BO 0
228
APPENDIX
Name
Read Write
7F/FF)
52 Operation panel/PU main display data selection 34 B4 0
functions
Display
54 FM terminal function selection 36 B6 0

55 Frequency monitoring reference 37 B7 0
56 Current monitoring reference 38 B8 0
Automatic
57 Restart coasting time 39 B9 0

functions
restart
58 Restart cushion time 3A BA 0

Additional
function
59 Remote setting function selection 3B BB 0
60 Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode 3C BC 0

61 Reference current 3D BD 0
62 Reference current for acceleration 3E BE 0
63 Reference current for deceleration 3F BF 0
65 Retry selection 41 C1 0
Stall prevention operation level reduction starting
Operation selection functions
66 42 C2 0
frequency
67 Number of retries at alarm occurrence 43 C3 0
68 Retry waiting time 44 C4 0
69 Retry count display erasure 45 C5 0
70 Special regenerative brake duty 46 C6 0
71 Applied motor 47 C7 0
72 PWM frequency selection 48 C8 0
73 0-5V/0-10V selection 49 C9 0
74 Filter time constant 4A CA 0
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop
75 4B CB 0
selection
77 Parameter write disable selection 4D CD 0
78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 4E CE 0
79 Operation mode selection 4F CF 0
80 Motor capacity 50 D0 0
General-purpose
vector control
magnetic flux
82 Motor excitation current 52 D2 0

83 Rated motor voltage 53 D3 0
84 Rated motor frequency 54 D4 0
90 Motor constant (R1) 5A DA 0
96 Auto-tuning setting/status 60 E0 0
117 Communication station number 11 91 1
118 Communication speed 12 92 1
Communication
119 Stop bit length 13 93 1

functions
120 Parity check presence/absence 14 94 1

121 Number of communication retries 15 95 1
122 Communication check time interval 16 96 1
123 Waiting time setting 17 97 1
124 CR • LF presence/absence selection 18 98 1
229
APPENDIX
Name
Read Write
7F/FF)
128 PID action selection 1C 9C 1
129 PID proportional band 1D 9D 1
PID control
130 PID integral time 1E 9E 1

131 Upper limit 1F 9F 1
132 Lower limit 20 A0 1
133 PID action set point for PU operation 21 A1 1
134 PID differential time 22 A2 1
Additional
145 PU display language selection 2D AD 1

function
146 Frequency setting command selection 2E AE 1
150 Output current detection level 32 B2 1

detection
Current
151 Output current detection period 33 B3 1

152 Zero current detection level 34 B4 1
153 Zero current detection period 35 B5 1
monitor function function
Sub
156 Stall prevention operation selection 38 B8 1

Initial Additional
160 User group read selection 00 80 2
171 Actual operation hour meter clear 0B 8B 2
173 User group 1 registration 0D 8D 2

functions
174 User group 1 deletion 0E 8E 2

User
175 User group 2 registration 0F 8F 2

176 User group 2 deletion 10 90 2
180 RL terminal function selection 14 94 2
assignment functions
181 RM terminal function selection 15 95 2

182 RH terminal function selection 16 96 2
Terminal
183 MRS terminal function selection 17 97 2

190 RUN terminal function selection 1E 9E 2
191 FU terminal function selection 1F 9F 2
192 A, B, C terminal function selection 20 A0 2
232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8) 28 A8 2
Multi-speed operation
233 Multi-speed setting (speed 9) 29 A9 2

234 Multi-speed setting (speed 10) 2A AA 2
235 Multi-speed setting (speed 11) 2B AB 2
236 Multi-speed setting (speed 12) 2C AC 2
237 Multi-speed setting (speed 13) 2D AD 2
238 Multi-speed setting (speed 14) 2E AE 2
239 Multi-speed setting (speed 15) 2F AF 2
240 Soft-PWM setting 30 B0 2
Sub functions
244 Cooling fan operation selection 34 B4 2

245 Rated motor slip 35 B5 2
246 Slip compensation response time 36 B6 2
247 Constant-output region slip compensation selection 37 B7 2
249 Earth (ground) fault detection at start 39 B9 2
230
APPENDIX
Name
Read Write
7F/FF)
selection
function
Stop
250 Stop selection 3A BA 2

Aditional
function
251 Output phase failure protection selection 3B BB 2
338* Operation command source 26 A6 3

Computer
function
339* Speed command source 27 A7 3

link
340* Link startup mode selection 28 A8 3

342 E2PROM write selection 2A AA 3
345* DeviceNet address startup data (lower byte) 2D AD 3
DeviceNetTM
functions
346* DeviceNet baudrate startup data (lower byte) 2E AE 3

347* DeviceNet address startup data (higher byte) 2F AF 3
348* DeviceNet baudrate startup data (higher byte) 30 B0 3
387* Initial communication delay time 57 D7 3
LONWORKS®
388* Send time interval at hart beat 58 D8 3

functions
389* Minimum sending time at hart beat 59 D9 3

390* % setting reference frequency 5A DA 3
391* Receive time interval at hart beat 5B DB 3
392* Event driven detection width 5C DC 3
500* Communication error recognition waiting time 00 80 5
Additional
Function
501* Communication error occurrence count display 01 81 5

502* Stop mode selection at communication error 02 82 5
900 FM terminal calibration 5C DC 1
902 Frequency setting voltage bias 5E DE 1
903 Frequency setting voltage gain 5F DF 1
904 Frequency setting current bias 60 E0 1
Calibration
functions
905 Frequency setting current gain 61 E1 1

922 Built-in frequency setting potentiometer bias 16 96 9
923 Built-in frequency setting potentiometer gain 17 97 9
990 PU buzzer control 5A DA 9
991 PU contrast adjustment 5B DB 9
*For only the 400V class fitted with the communication option.
DeviceNetTM is a registered trademark of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association,
Inc.).
LONWORKS® is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation in the U.S.A. and other
countries.
231
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 2 When using the communication

option. (400V class only)
Operation at Communication Error Occurrence
The extended functions for E.OPT error and E. 3 error have been added to this
instruction manual. (Pr. 500 to Pr. 502)
(1) Pr. 500 "communication error execution waiting time"

You can set the waiting time from occurrence of a communication line fault to
communication error indication "E.OPT".
Parameter Minimum Setting
Setting Range Factory Setting
Number Increment
500 0 to 999.8 s 0.1 s 0
Communication line status Normal Abnormal
Communication error "E.OPT" Indication output
Time set in Pr. 500

If a communication line fault still persists after the time set in Pr. 500 has elapsed, it is
recognized as a communication error and the communication error indication "E.OPT" is output.
If communication is restored to normal during the set time, operation is continued
without a communication error indication.
(2) Pr. 501 "communication error occurrence count indication"

You can display the cumulative number of communication line faults that occurred.
Write "0" to Pr. 501 to clear the communication error occurrence count.
Number Increment
501 0 1 0
Count timing according to

communication line status
Ab-
Normal normal Normal Abnormal
1 count 1 count
At the time when a communication line fault occurs, one count is made in Pr. 501
"communication error occurrence count indication".
Note: The communication error occurrence count indication is temporarily stored in RAM.
As it is reflected to E2PROM per hour only, performing power-on reset or inverter
reset causes the last value stored in E2PROM to display as the value of Pr. 501.
232
APPENDIX
(3) Pr. 502 "stop mode selection at communication error"
You can select inverter operation to be performed in the occurrence of a communication
line fault or an option error.
Number Increment
502 0, 1, 2 1 0
(About the settings)

Error Recognition after Elapse
At Occurrence of Fault At Resolution of Fault
Pr. 502 of Pr. 500 Time
Fault
Setting Operating Indi- Alarm Operating Indi- Alarm Operating Indi- Alarm
status cation output status cation output status cation output
Not Coasting E.OPT
Communication line
0 Continued No E.OPT lit Provided Stop held Provided

provided to stop kept lit
Decele-
Not E.OPT lit Provided E.OPT
1 Continued No ration to Stop held Provided
provided after stop after stop kept lit
stop
Decele-
Not E.OPT lit Not E.OPT Not
2 Continued No ration to Restart
provided after stop provided kept lit provided
stop
Coasting Coasting
0 E.3 lit Provided E.3 lit Provided Stop held E.3 kept lit Provided
to stop to stop
Option error
Decele- Decele-
E.3 lit after Provided E.3 lit after Provided
1 ration to ration to Stop held E.3 kept lit Provided
stop after stop stop after stop
stop stop
Decele- Decele-
E.3 lit after Provided E.3 lit after Provided
2 ration to ration to Stop held E.3 kept lit Provided
stop after stop stop after stop
stop stop
Note: 1. A communication error [E.OPT (fault data: A0H)] is a fault on the

communication line, and a communication error [E. 3 (fault data: F3H)] is a
communication error inside the inverter.
2. The alarm output is the ABC contact output or alarm bit output.
3. If the Pr. 502 setting is 1 or 2, the deceleration time is the ordinary
deceleration time setting (Pr. 8, Pr. 44, Pr. 45).
4. The acceleration time at restart is the ordinary acceleration time setting (Pr.
7, Pr. 44).
5. If the Pr. 502 setting is 2, the operation command/speed command at restart
follows the command before occurrence of a fault.
6. For the setting of alarm output, the fault definition is stored in the alarm
history.(Write to the alarm history is performed when the alarm output is
provided.)If the alarm output is not provided, the fault definition overwrites
the alarm indication of the alarm history temporarily but is not stored.After
the fault is cleared, the alarm indication is reset and returns to the ordinary
monitor and the alarm history returns to the original alarm history.
7. When a communication line fault, which occurred at the Pr. 502 setting of 2,
is cleared during deceleration, acceleration restarts at that point.
(Acceleration does not restart at occurrence of a Option fault.)
233
APPENDIX
Switching mode between the PU operation mode and network operation
mode (when used with a communication option)
You can switch operation between the PU operation and network operation from the operation
panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04) during starting up in the network operation mode.
Pr. 340 Mode at Power On or at Restoration

Operation Mode
Setting Pr. 79 from Instantaneous Power Failure
Inverter operates in the network operation mode.
PU or network
0 Operation mode can be switched between the PU
operation
operation and the network operation.
1 PU operation Inverter operates in the PU operation mode.
2 Network operation Inverter operates in the network operation mode.
External/PU combined Input running frequency from the PU and the start
3
operation signal from outside.
External/PU combined Input running frequency from outside and the start
4
operation signal from the PU.
Inverter operates in the network operation mode.
6 Switch-over Operation mode can be switched between the PU
10
operation and the network operation.
MRS signal ON..... Inverter operates in the
external operation mode.
(Operation mode can be
7* PU operation interlock switched to the PU operation
mode by the parameter unit.)
MRS signal OFF... Inverter operates in the
X16 signal ON ...... Inverter operates in the
Operation mode switch-
8* over by the external
X16 signal OFF .... Inverter operates in the PU
signal
operation mode.
* When Pr. 79 = "7 or 8", the inverter operates in the same manner as when Pr. 340 =
"0". (The inverter will not operate in the network operation mode at powering on.)
234
APPENDIX
When Pr. 340="10" and Pr. 79="0 or 6", operation can be switched between the PU
operation and network operation from the operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04).
• Operation panel
Shifts to the PU operation mode when is displayed on the operation
mode switching menu and shifts to the network operation when is
displayed.
• FR-PU04
Shifts to the PU operation mode when is displayed and to the network operation
mode when is displayed.
REMARKS
1. Change of the Pr. 340 setting is made valid when powering on or resetting
the inverter.
2. When copying parameters to the inverter which is not available with Pr.
340="10", the inverter operates in the same manner as when Pr. 340 ="0".
For Pr. 340="0, 1", refer to the instruction manual of each communication
option.
235
For Maximum Safety
• Mitsubishi general-purpose inverters are not designed or manufactured to be
used in equipment or systems in situations that can affect or endanger
human life.
• When considering this product for operation in special applications such as

machinery or systems used in passenger transportation, medical, aerospace,
atomic power, electric power, or submarine repeating applications, please
contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
• Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict quality

control, you are strongly advised to install safety devices to prevent serious
accidents when it is used in facilities where breakdowns of the product are
likely to cause a serious accident.
• Please do not use this product for loads other than 3-phase induction motors.
REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date *Manual Number Revision
Nov., 1997 IB(NA)-66813-A First edition
Jun., 1998 IB(NA)-66813-B Additions
• Single-phase 200V power input specifications
• Response to Standard-compliant models
• FR-E520-5.5K, 7.5K
• Pr. 146 "frequency setting command selection"
• Pr. 249 "earth (ground) fault detection at start"
Modifications
• Corrections to clerical errors
• Factory setting of Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Jul., 1999 IB(NA)-66813-C Additions
• Three-phase 400V power input specifications
• Single-phase 100V power input specifications
Modifications
• Control circuit terminal screw tightening torque
Nov., 2000 IB(NA)-66813-D Additions
• Pr. 251 "output phase failure protection selection"
• Pr. 342 "E2PROM write selection" (400V class only)
Modifications
• Alarm indications (E. 6, E. 7)
• Instructions for compliance with U.S. and Canadian
Electrical Codes
Jul., 2001 IB(NA)-66813-E Modifications
• Pr. 342 "E2PROM write selection"
• Alarm indications (E. 3)
Jul., 2003 IB(NA)-66813-F Additions
• Pr. 503 "capacitor life timer"
• Pr. 504 "capacitor life alarm output set time
Modifications
• The setting range of Pr.240 "Soft-PWM setting"
• The setting range of Pr.340 "link start up mode
selection"
May, 2004 IB(NA)-66813-G Additions
• Control logic change function for the 100V/200V class

E500 Ac Drive Genis Kullanim Kilavuzu

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

E500 Ac Drive Genis Kullanim Kilavuzu

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

E500 Ac Drive Genis Kullanim Kilavuzu

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TRANSISTORIZED INVERTER

FR-E520-0.1K to 7.5K(C) OUTLINE Chapter 1

FR-E510W-0.1K to 0.75K OPERATION/

This section is specifically about safety matters

Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous

(1) Transportation and installation

(3) Trial run

(5) Emergency stop

(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement

(7) Disposing of the inverter

(8) General instructions

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 13

2.1 Installation ............................................................................................................ 14

3.1 Pre-Operation Information................................................................................... 58

4.1 Parameter List ...................................................................................................... 76

CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 185

5.1 Errors (Alarms) ................................................................................................... 186

CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION 199

6.1 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection.................................................. 200

CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS 213

7.1 Standard Specifications .................................................................................... 214

APPENDIX 1 Instruction Code List .......................................................................... 228

1.1 Pre-Operation Information ....................... 2

1.1 Pre-Operation Information

Serial number SERIAL :

Inverter type Serial number PASSED

1.2 Basic Configuration

(1) Front view

Operation panel front cover

Built-in frequency setting potentiometer

(2) Without front cover and operation panel front cover

Overhead cross-sectional view

(For the FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K)

(For the FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K)

zUsing the connection cable for operation

zMounting the operation panel on an enclosure

1.3.5 Removal of the operation panel front cover

Wiring port cover

1) Handle the unit carefully.

3) Note on the ambient temperature.

4) Install the inverter on a non-combustible surface.

5) Avoid high temperature and high humidity.

4) Clearances around the inverter

7) For installation in an enclosure

When using current input as the

Note: 1. If the potentiometer is to be operated often, use a 2W1kΩ potentiometer.

(1) Description of the main circuit terminals

RL selection appropriate to select multiple speeds. function selection

Used to reset the protective circuit activated. Turn on the

By entering 0 to 5VDC (0 to 10VDC), the maximum

resistance 10kΩ. Maximum permissible voltage 20V.

protective function activated. 230VAC 0.3A,

injection brake operation (*1). changes

Permissible load 24VDC 0.1A. terminal

FM For meter (*2). The output signal is Frequency permissible

be made using the RS-485 protocol.

• Conforming Standard : EIA Standard RS-485

Earth (ground) Cable Gauge

(2) Terminal block layout of the power circuit

N/- P1 P/+ PR N/- P/+